Soldadura General - Catalog-(S) PDF

http://www.amfiller.
com
Staineless Steel Wire

Flux Cored Wire
Nickel
QUALITY WELDING ALLOYS
6015 Murphy Street, Houston, TX 77033, USA (T) 1.713.649.8785 (F) 1.713.644.9628
A T
L O
M 6015 Murphy Street Houston, TX 77033 B
(T) 1.800.394.4550 / 1.713.649.8785 (F) 1.713.644.9628
C C
B
T
• Real People • Real Service • Real Fast •
S
B L
R •
Get Your Quality Filler Metal
Z A
American Filler Metals’
manufacturing capabilities
T allow us to provide a wider H
I •
variety of options with regards
T F
to cut lengths, spool sizes and
diameter of wires than many
M of our competitors. C
A •
G I
T N
S E71T-1 E71T-GS •
T Nickel K
STS FCW STS Wires
A
S
E
R
Made In USA Products •
E
O
M
A
Call us today! Material S
S
Safety •
I Toll Free: 1.800.394.4550 M D W
N Data
Telephone: 1.713.649.8785 S
Sheet
I
N Fax: 1.713.644.9628 F
C
F
W
O
2
Go Back to Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Carbon Steel Low Alloys - Electrodes Low Alloys - Wires Hardfacing

Page 7 ~ Page 13 Page 17 ~ Page 31 Page 33 ~ Page 51 Page 53 ~ Page 65
Cast Iron Nickel Alloys STS Electrodes STS Wires

Flux Cored Wires Aluminum Alloys Cobalt Alloys Bronze Alloys

Titanium Alloys Magnesium Alloys Tungsten Alloys Aerospace Alloys

S Material
M D
Safety
Data
S
Reference & Information Sheet
Page 244 ~ Page 261
Maintenance Alloys
Page 226 ~ Page 241
3
A T
L O
M 6015 Murphy Street Houston, TX 77033 B
(T) 1.800.394.4550 / 1.713.649.8785 (F) 1.713.644.9628
C C
B •
T S
B L
R •
Z A
T H
I •
T F
M C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A Important Notice for All Users of This Book

S
E
The information contained herein is intended for general information only and not for specification purposes. •
R American Filler Metals Company presents all the technical information, data and applications to permit you E
O to make your own evaluations and decisions, and is not to be mistaken as expressed or implied warranties for
these or other applications.
M
American Filler Metals Company assumes no liability for results or damages incurred from the use of any
S
A
information contained herein, in whole or in part. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
4
A T
L O
M B
Carbon Steel Electrodes
C C
B Coated Electrode •
T AFM Product AWS Classification Page S
AFM E6010 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6010 7
B AFM E6011 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6011 8 L

R AFM E6013 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6013 9 •
Z AFM E7014 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7014 10
A
AFM E7018 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7018 11
T AFM E7018-1 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7018-1 12 H

I AFM E7024 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7024 13 •
T F
M Click to Download
C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
5
A T
L O
M B
Carbon Steel Electrode
C C
B •
Order of Mandatory Classification Designators
T AWS/SFA A5.1 S
B L
R Designates an electrode.
•
Z A
Designates the tensile strength (minimum), in ksi.

T H
I •
T Designates the welding position in which electrodes are usable, F
the type of covering, and the kind of welding current
for which the electrodes are suitable.
M C
A Designates that the electrode also meets •
the optional supplemental requirements for toughness
G and improved elongation of the weld metal.
I
T N
S • Welding Current •
T E 70 18 - 1 DCEP - Direct Current Electrode Positive (DC, Reverse Polarity)
K
DCEN - Direct Current Electrode Negative (DC, Straight Polarity)
A • Welding Position
S
E Type of Welding Welding Position
Designation
BS EN AWS •
R
Flat PA 1G E
O
Horizontal PC 2G
Butt Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3G
M Vertical Upwards PF 3G S
A Overhead PE 4G •
I Flat PA 1F
W
N Horizontal PB 2F
Fillet Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3F
I Vertical Upwards PF 3F
F
N Horizontal Overhead PD 4F
C
F
W
O
6
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E6010 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T High Cellulose Sodium Covering S
Description:
AFM E6010 is a high cellulose coated “fastfreeze” electrode.
B L
It produces a deep penetrating, forceful, spray type arc and readily removable, thin, friable slag which may not
R seem to completely cover the weld bead. It can be used for welding in the flat, vertical-up, vertical-down and •
Z overhead positions with DC reverse polarity. A
Welding Characteristics:
T AFM E6010 will provide good arc stability with light slag while welding dirty, rusty or painted material that H
I cannot thoroughly be cleaned. •
T It will produce high deposition and low spatter loss in addition to a weld puddle that wets and spreads well. F
Its “fast-freeze” characteristic allows it to set up fast enough to make it ideal for vertical up and vertical down
welding and is frequently selected for welding pipe.
M C
Applications:
A AFM E6010 is recommended for welding API grades A25, A, B, and X42 pipe and in shipbuilding, •
G buildings, bridges, storage tanks, piping, and pressure vessel fittings. I
Recommended Current Ranges (DC+):

T N
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
S •
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T K
Flat 60 ~ 85 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 160 150 ~ 200
V&O 50 ~ 70 70 ~ 110 110 ~ 150 130 ~ 170
A
S
E Typical Mechanical Properties:
•
R Tensile Strength psi 70,000
E
O Yield Strength psi 61,000
Elongation in 2” (%) 30
M Reduction in Area (%) 60
S
A Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 36ft. Lbs
•
I
Standard Packaging: W
N
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): 10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
I C Mn Si P S
0.13 0.51 0.20 0.014 0.006 F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
7
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E6011 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T High Cellulose Potassium Covering S
Description:
AFM E6011 is a high-cellulose potassium electrode designed to be used with AC current and to duplicate
B L
the usability characteristics and mechanical properties of AFM E6010.
R Although AFM E6011 is usable with dcep (electrode positive), a decrease in joint penetration will be noted •
Z when compared to AFM E6010. A
T AFM E6011 will have similar arc action, slag, and fillet weld appearance to those of AFM E6010. H
I The use of AC current with AFM E6011 will eliminate arc blow sometimes experienced with AFM E6010 DC •
T current. F
Applications:
AFM E6011 is commonly used for welding mild steels such as ASTM A-36, A-283, A-284, A-285, A-515,
M and A-516. C
A Typical applications are railroad cars, truck frames, storage tanks, bridges, boilers, barges and ships. •
G I
Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+):
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T N
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
S •
Flat 65 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 130 ~ 170 170 ~ 210
T K
V&O 50 ~ 75 70 ~ 110 110 ~ 150 130 ~ 170
A Typical Mechanical Properties: S

E Tensile Strength psi 69,000
•
R Yield Strength psi 68,000
E
O Elongation in 2” (%) 29
Reduction in Area (%) 60
M Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 36ft. Lbs S
A
•
I
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): W
N
C Mn Si P S Standard Packaging:
0.13 0.50 0.19 0.015 0.008 10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
8
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E6013 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T High Titania Potassium Covering S
Description:
AFM E6013 is a versatile electrode with a wide variety of applications for light gauge and heavy plate.
B L
Slag removal is easy, often is self cleaning on heavy plate, and has a smooth arc transfer with a fine ripple bead
R appearance. •
Z A
AFM E6013 produce a flat fillet weld face and are suitable for making groove welds because of their concave
T weld face and easily removable slag. H
I Welds with the smaller diameters often meet the Grade 1 radiographic requirements. •
T F
Applications:
AFM E6013 is a high titania general purpose coated electrode.
It is commonly used for auto bodies and fenders, farm implements, metal furniture and any application where
M low spatter and good bead appearance is desirable. C
A •
G I
Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC-):
Dia. (inch) 1/16” 5/64” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 1.6 mm 2.0 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T N
Flat 25 ~ 50 35 ~ 60 50 ~ 100 80 ~ 130 140 ~ 180 180 ~ 230
S •
V&O 25 ~ 50 35 ~ 60 50 ~ 90 60 ~ 110 110 ~ 160 120 ~ 160
T K
Typical Mechanical Properties:
A Tensile Strength psi 67,000 S
E Yield Strength psi 62,000 •
R Elongation in 2” (%) 29 E
O Reduction in Area (%) 58
Charphy V-Notch @ 32oF 58ft. Lbs
M
S
A
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): •
I
C Mn Si P S W
N
0.08 0.38 0.38 0.014 0.008
I
F
N Standard Packaging: S
C
F 10# Package; 60# Master Carton. M D
W
O S
9
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7014 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T Iron Powder, Titania Covering S
Description:
AFM E7014 is similar to AFM E6013, but with the addition of iron powder for obtaining higher deposition
B L
efficiency.
R The iron powder also permits the use of higher welding currents. •
Z A
AFM E7014 fillet welds tend to be flat to slightly convex. The slag is easily removed and in most cases re-
T moves itself. H
I The joint penetration obtained allows for welding over a wide root opening due to poor fit. •
T F
Applications:
AFM E7014 is commonly used for welding mild steels ASTM A-36, A-113, A-283, A-284, A-285, A-306,
A-515, and A-516.
M Typical applications include construction equipment, metal fixtures, automotive parts, barges and farm C
A machinery. •
G I
Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC±):
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm N
S Flat 50 ~ 100 90 ~ 140 150 ~ 210 200 ~ 240 •
T V&O 40 ~ 65 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 160 120 ~ 160 K
A Typical Mechanical Properties:

S
E Tensile Strength psi 79,800
•
R Yield Strength psi 68,500
E
O Elongation in 2” (%) 30
M Charphy V-Notch @ 32oF 58 ft. Lbs
S
A
•
I Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): W
N C Mn Si P S
0.08 0.60 0.35 0.015 0.019
I
F
C
W
O S
10
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7018 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T Low Hydrogen Potassium, Iron Powder Covering S
Description:
AFM E7018 is an all position iron powder, low hydrogen electrode that may be used with AC or DC reverse
B L
polarity.
R •
Z Welding Characteristics: A
AFM E7018 has a smooth, quiet arc, very low spatter, and medium arc penetration that can be used at high
travel speeds.
T The fillet welds in the horizontal and flat welding positions have a slightly convex weld face, with a smooth and H
I finely rippled surface. •
T F
Applications:
AFM E7018 is used for welding carbon and low alloy steels, and are also used for joints involving
high-strength and high carbon.
M As is common with all low hydrogen electrodes, a short arc length should be maintained at all times. C
A •
G I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T N
Flat 55 ~ 85 90 ~ 140 130 ~ 185 190 ~ 250
S •
V&O 55 ~ 80 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 180 160 ~ 210
T K

O Reduction in Area (%) 75
Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 65 ft. Lbs
M
S
A
•
I Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
W
N C Mn Si P S
0.04 1.06 0.69 0.012 0.011 Standard Packaging:
10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
11
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7018-1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
Description:
AFM E7018-1 is an all position low hydrogen iron powder electrode that is intended for welds requiring
B L
a lower transition temperature than is normally available from E7018 electrodes.
R It is designed to have the same usability and weld metal composition as AFM E7018, except that •
Z the manganese content is set at the high end of the range. A
Applications:
T AFM E7018-1 is used for welding the wide variety of carbon and low alloy steels that require impact H
I toughness at low temperatures. •
T F
AFM E7018-1 displays exceptional impacts at low temperatures and has a smooth metal transfer that keeps
spatter to a minimum with easily removable slag.
M C
A •
G Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 55 ~ 85 90 ~ 140 130 ~ 185 190 ~ 250 N
S V&O 55 ~ 80 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 180 160 ~ 210 •
T K
Tensile Strength psi 81,600
A Yield Strength psi 69,000 S
E Elongation in 2” (%) 30 •
R Reduction in Area (%) 72 E
O Charphy V-Notch @ -50oF 104 ft. Lbs
M
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S
A
C Mn Si P S •
I
0.05 1.30 0.50 0.012 0.011 W
N
Standard Packaging:
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
12
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E7024 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.1
T Iron Powder, Titania Covering S
Description:
AFM E7024 is a high speed, heavy-coated, iron powder electrode. The coverings usually amount to about
B L
50% of the weight of the electrode, resulting in higher deposition efficiency.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM E7024 can be used on mild and some alloy steels used in earth-moving and construction equipment,
truck bodies, ships, barges, and railcars.
T H
I Welding Characteristics: •
T AFM E7024 electrodes are characterized by having a quiet arc, very low spatter, low arc penetration and are F
well suited for making fillet welds in the flat or horizontal position.
The weld face is slightly convex to flat and has a very smooth surface with a very fine ripple.
They can be used with high travel speeds.
M C
A •
G Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC±): I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 100 ~ 145 140 ~ 190 180 ~ 250 230 ~ 305 N
S •
T Typical Mechanical Properties: K
A Yield Strength psi 74,000
Elongation in 2” (%) 25 S
E
Reduction in Area (%) 65 •
R
Charphy V-Notch @ -18oF 25 ft. Lbs E
O
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S

A C Mn Si P S
•
I 0.06 0.86 0.62 0.011 0.017
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
13
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electordes
C C
B Coated Electrode •
AFM E7018-A1 AWS/SFA A5.5 E7018-A1 17
B AFM E8018-B2 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-B2 18 L

R AFM E9018-B3 AWS/SFA A5.5 E9018-B3 19 •
Z AFM E8018-C1 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C1 20
A
AFM E8018-C2 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C2 21
T AFM E8018-C3 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C3 22 H

I AFM E801X-B6 AWS/SFA A5.5 E801X-B6 23 •
T F
AFM E801X-B8 AWS/SFA A5.5 E801X-B8 24
AFM E9015-B9 AWS/SFA A5.5 E9015-B9 25
M AFM E9018-B9 AWS/SFA A5.5 E9018-B9 26 C
A AFM E11018M AWS/SFA A5.5 E11018M 27
•
G I
AFM E12018M AWS/SFA A5.5 E12018M 29
AFM 4130 29
T AFM 4140 NO AWS/SFA Classification 29 N
S •
AFM 4340 30
T K
Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures 31

A
S
E
•
R
E
O
Click to Download
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
14
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electordes & Wires
C C
B Order of Mandatory Classification Designators •
T AWS/SFA A5.5 S
B Designates an electrode.
L
R •
Z A
Designates the tensile strength (minimum), in ksi.

T H
I •
T F
Designates the welding position in which electrodes are usable,
the type of covering, and the kind of welding current for which
the electrodes are suitable.
M C
A •
G Designates that the chemical composition of the weld metal I
deposit.
T N
S •
T • Welding Current K
E 70 18 - A1 DCEP - Direct Current Electrode Positive (DC, Reverse Polarity)
A
S
E • Welding Position
Designation •
R Type of Welding Welding Position
BS EN AWS E
O
Flat PA 1G
Horizontal PC 2G
M Butt Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3G S
A Vertical Upwards PF 3G •
I Overhead PE 4G
W
N Flat PA 1F
Horizontal PB 2F
I Fillet Welding Vertical Downwards PG 3F
F
N Vertical Upwards PF 3F
C
F Horizontal Overhead PD 4F
W
O
15
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electordes & Wires
C Order of Mandatory Classification Designators C

B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T Designates use as either an electrode or rod (ER), S
or use only as an electrode (E).
Indicates in 1000 psi increments, the minimum tensile strength

B of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested L
R according to the A5.18 specification. •
- In this case, 70 indicates 70 000 psi.
Z A
Indicates whether the filler metal is solid (S) or composite (C).
T Indicates the chemical composition of a solid electrode or H

the chemical composition of the weld metal produced by
I a composite electrode.
•
T The use of the “GS” suffix designates filler metals intended for F
single pass applications only.
M Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. C

A •
G ER 70 S - X N HZ I
E 70 C - X Y N HZ
T ER 48 S - X N HZ The letter “N” as a suffix to a classification indicates that N
S E 48 C - X Y N HZ the weld metal is intended for the core belt region of nuclear
reactor vessels, as described in the Annex to the specification.
•
T This suffix changes the limits on the phosphorus and copper K
as follows:
P = 0.012% maximum / Cu = 0.08% maximum
A
S
E
•
R
E
O Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification of
composite electrodes.
Carbon dioxide (AWS A5.32 Class SG-C) is indicated by “C”
M and 75–80% Argon/balance CO2
(AWS A5.32 Class SG-AC-Y, where Y is 20 to 25) is indicated S
A by “M.” •
I
W
N Indicates in 10 MPa increments, the minimum tensile strength
of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested
according to the A5.18M specification.
I - In this case, 48 indicates 480 MPa. F
N
C
F
W
O
16
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Electrode
C
B
AFM E7018-A1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E7018-A1 electrodes are very similar to AFM E7018, except that 1/2% molybdenum has been added.
B This addition increases the strength of the weld metal, especially at elevated temperatures, and provides some
L
R increase in corrosion resistance; however, it may reduce the notch toughness of the weld metal. •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E7018-A1 is commonly used to weld CMo steel base metals such as ASTM A204 plate and A335-P1
T pipe. H
I •
T Welding Characteristics: F
AFM E7018-A1 has a high deposition rate, fine bead appearance, low spatter, easily removable slag, and me-
dium penetration.
M Preheat: C
A See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31. •
G I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm N
S Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 200 ~ 300 •
T K
A Yield Strength psi 86,000 S
E Elongation in 2” (%) 28 •
R Reduction in Area (%) 70 E
O Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 87 ft. Lbs
M
A
C Mn Si P S Mo •
I
0.06 0.72 0.49 0.016 0.013 0.53 W
N
I Standard Packaging: F
N 10# Package; 60# Master Carton. S
C
F M D
W
O S
17
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E8018-B2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E8018-B2 is a low hydrogen electrode that may be used with AC or DC reverse polarity.
B L
It is different from “fast freeze” electrodes in that the weld metal freezes quite rapidly even though the slag is
R relatively fluid. •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E8018-B2 is used for the welding of 1/2% Cr-1/2% Mo, 1% Cr-1/2% Mo, and 1 1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo
T steels. H
I It is used to weld A355-P11 Pipe and A387 Fr. 11 Plate. Common applications include boiler steam pipes in •
T power plants, oil refining equipment, ships and chemical plants. F
Preheat:
See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31.
M C
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 60 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 130 ~ 190 190 ~ 250 N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
A Tensile Strength psi 99,000
Yield Strength psi 87,000 S
E
Elongation in 2” (%) 25 •
R
Reduction in Area (%) 70 E
O
Charphy V-Notch @ -32oF 22 ft. Lbs
M
S
A Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
•
I C Mn Si Cr Mo P S
W
N 0.06 0.90 0.63 1.32 0.55 0.013 0.007
I
F
C
W
O S
18
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E9018-B3 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
B AFM E9018-B3 is a low hydrogen electrode that may be used with AC or DC reverse polarity. L
R It is different from “fast freeze” electrodes in that the weld freezes quite rapidly even though the slag is rela-
•
tively fluid.
Z A
Applications:
AFM E9018-B3 is used for welding chromemoly steels such as those of the 2 1/4% Cr-1% Mo type. It is used
T to weld A335-P22 Pipe and A387 Gr. 22 Plate. Common applications include cast steels, boiler and heat ex- H
I changer tubes, cast and forged steels. •
T F
Preheat:
M C
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
G I
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Flat 60 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 130 ~ 190 190 ~ 250
V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S •
T Typical Mechanical Properties: K
Yield Strength psi 87,000
A
Elongation in 2” (%) 22 S
E
Charphy V-Notch @ -40oF 24 ft. Lbs •
R
E
O
Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
M C Mn Si Cr Mo P S
S
A 0.06 0.77 0.75 2.25 1.02 0.014 0.010
•
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I 10# Package; 60# Master Carton.
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
19
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E8018-C1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E8018-C1 is a low hydrogen electrode that contains about 2.50% Ni.
B It produces weld metal with increased strength without being airhardenable or with increased notch L
R toughness at temperatures as low as -175ºF (-115ºC). •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E8018-C1 is used for welding nickelbearing steels in low temperature applications where toughness of
T the weld metal at lower temperatures is important. H
I •
T Preheat: F

M Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” C
A Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
G Flat 45 ~ 75 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 I
V&O 45 ~ 75 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S •
T K
A Reduction in Area (%) 60
S
E Charphy V-Notch @ -75oF 94 ft. Lbs
•
R
E
O Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
C Mn Si P S Ni
M 0.06 0.98 0.60 0.013 0.007 2.41 S
A
•
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
20
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E8018-C2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.5
Description:
AFM E8018-C2 is a low hydrogen electrode that contains about 3.50% Ni.
B It produces weld metal with increased strength without being airhardenable or with increased notch tough- L
R ness at temperatures as low as -175ºF (-115ºC). •
Z A
Applications:
AFM E8018-C2 is used for welding 2%-4% nickel-bearing steels in low temperature applications where
T toughness of the weld metal at lower temperatures is important. H
I •
T Preheat: F
M Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): C

A Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
G Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm I
Flat 65 ~ 95 90 ~ 130 135 ~ 180 190 ~ 240
V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties: •
T Tensile Strength psi 94,000
K
A Elongation in 2” (%) 22
S
E Charphy V-Notch @ -100oF 44 ft. Lbs
•
R
E
O Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
C Mn Si P S Ni
M 0.07 1.12 0.32 0.015 0.007 3.45 S
A
•
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
21
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E8018-C3 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
Description:
B AFM E8018-C3 is low hydrogen electrodes deposit 1% Ni weld metal. L
It is used primarily to weld high-tensile steels in the 70-80 ksi tensile strength range where notch toughness
R at temperatures as low as -40ºF (-40ºC) is required.
•
Z A
Preheat:
T H
I Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): •
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Flat 65 ~ 95 90 ~ 130 135 ~ 180 190 ~ 240
M V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A C
A •
G I
T Yield Strength psi 77,000 N
S Elongation in 2” (%) 31 •
T Charphy V-Notch @ -40oF 44 ft. Lbs K
A
E
C Mn Si P S Ni •
R
0.07 1.12 0.32 0.015 0.007 3.45 E
O
M
S
A Standard Packaging: •
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
22
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E801X-B6 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T AFM E801X-B6 was formally classified as E502 stainless steel under AWS A5.4-81. S
It is used in welding ASTM A 387 Grade 5 base material.
X-denotes 5,6, & 8
B L
E8015-B6 - Low Hydrogen Sodium Covering
R •
E8016-B6 - Low Hydrogen Potassium Covering
Z E8018-B6 - Low Hydrogen Potassium, Iron Powder Covering A
Description:
T AFM E8015-B6, E8016-B6 & E8018B6 electrodes are used for welding base metal of similar composition H
I (alloy 501 & 502), usually in the form of pipe or tubing. •
The alloy is an air-hardening material; therefore, when welding with AFM E8015-B6, E8016-B6 & E8018-B6
T F
preheat and post weld heat treatment are required.
Preheat:
M See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31. C
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 190 ~ 290 N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
O
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):

C Mn Si Cr P S Ni Mo S
A
0.06 0.60 0.23 4.60 0.01 0.01 0.10 0.46 •
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I 10# Package; 60# Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
23
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E801X-B8 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T AFM E801X-B8 was formally classified as E505 stainless steel under AWS A5.4-81. S
It is used in welding ASTM A 387 Grade 9 base materials.
X-denotes 5,6, & 8
B L
E8015-B8 - Low Hydrogen Sodium Covering
R •
E8016-B8 - Low Hydrogen Potassium Covering
Z E8018-B8 - Low Hydrogen Potassium, Iron Powder Covering A
Description:
T AFM E8015-B8, E8016-B8 & E8018-B8 electrodes are used for welding base metal of similar composition H
I (alloy 501 & 502), usually in the form of pipe or tubing. •
The alloy is an air-hardening material; therefore, when welding with AFM E8015-B8, E8016-B8 & E8018-B8
T F
preheat and post weld heat treatment are required.
Preheat:
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 190 ~ 290
N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A
•
T K

A
Tensile Strength psi 100,000 S
E
Yield Strength psi 79,000 •
R
Elongation in 2” (%) 23 E
O
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S

A C Mn Si Cr P S Ni Mo
•
I 0.05 0.74 0.31 8.97 0.015 0.008 0.09 0.94 W
N
C
F M D
W
O S
24
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E9015-B9 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T Low Hydrogen Sodium Covering S
Description:
B AFM E9015-B9 is a 9% Cr-1% Mo, low hydrogen electrode modified with niobium (columbium) and L
vanadium designed to provide improved creep strength, toughness, fatigue life, and oxidation and corrosion
R resistance at elevated temperatures.
•
Z Due to the higher elevated temperature properties of AFM E9015-B9, components that are now fabricated A
from stainless and ferritic steels may be fabricated from a single alloy, eliminating the problems associated
with dissimilar welds.
T H
I Applications: •
T AFM E9015-B9 is used for welding A213-T91 Tube, A335-P91 Pipe, and A387 Gr. 91 Plate. F
Preheat:
M C
A •
G Recommended Current Ranges (DC+): I
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 70 ~ 100 90 ~ 160 130 ~ 220 190 ~ 290 N
S V&O 60 ~ 90 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
A
E
R
E
O
M C Mn Si P S Cr Ni
0.10 1.0 0.20 0.01 0.01 9.0 0.20 S
A
Mo V Cb Cu Al N •
I
1.0 0.20 0.03 0.10 <0.01 0.04 W
N
C
F M D
W
O S
25
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E9018-B9 C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
Description:
AFM E9018-B9 is a 9% Cr-1% Mo, low hydrogen electrode modified with niobium (columbium) and
B vanadium designed to provide improved creep strength, toughness, fatigue life, and oxidation and corrosion L
R resistance at elevated temperatures. •
Z It is similar to AFM E9015-B9, except it contains an addition of iron powder which improves deposition rates. A
Due to the higher elevated temperature properties of AFM E9018-B9, components that are now fabricated
from stainless and ferritic steels may be fabricated from a single alloy, eliminating the problems associated
with dissimilar welds.
T H
I Applications: •
T AFM E9018-B9 is used for welding A213-T91 Tube, A335-P91 Pipe, and A387 Gr. 91 Plate. F
Preheat:
A •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 N
S V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A •
T K
A Tensile Strength psi 110,000
E
R
E
O
M C Mn Si P S Cr Ni
S
A 0.10 1.0 0.20 0.01 0.01 9.0 0.20
•
I Mo V Cb Cu Al N
W
N 1.0 0.20 0.03 0.10 <0.01 0.04
C
F M D
W
O S
26
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM E11018M C
AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T Iron Powder, Low Hydrogen Covering S
Description:
B AFM E11018M was originally designed for military applications such as welding HY80 and HY100 type L
steels. To achieve desired weldmetal properties and soundness, AFM E11018M has small alloy additions
R (especially some Ni) and require careful control of moisture in the electrode covering and from other sources
•
Z of hydrogen. A
Applications:
T AFM E11018M is used to weld all forms of T-1 steel. H
I It can also be used where high-strength welds with excellent low temperature impact properties are desired. •
T F
Preheat:
M Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): C
A Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
G Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm I
Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240
V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties: •
T Tensile Strength psi 115,000 K
A Elongation in 2” (%) 23
Reduction in Area (%) 62 S
E
Charphy V-Notch @ -60oF 44 ft. Lbs •
R
E
O
M C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo S
A 0.05 1.50 0.30 0.018 0.015 0.30 1.75 0.30 •
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
27
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E12018M C
B AWS/SFA A5.5 •
T Iron Powder, Low Hydrogen Covering S
Description:
B AFM E12018M is used to weld low alloy, high tensile steels where welds of 120 ksi minimum tensile L
strength is required.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM E12018M is commonly used to weld forgings, plate castings, and pressure vessels.
T Preheat: H
I See Table “Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures” on page 31. •
T F
Recommended Current Ranges (DC+):
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
M Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm C
A Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 •
G V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A I

T Tensile Strength psi 133,400 N
S Yield Strength psi 120,500 •
T Elongation in 2” (%) 18 K
A Charphy V-Notch @ -60oF 26 ft. Lbs
S
E
•
R Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
E
O C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo
0.05 1.65 0.34 0.019 0.016 0.85 2.0 0.45
M
S
A
Standard Packaging: •
I 10# Package; 40# Master Carton. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
28
A T
L O
M B
C AFM 4130 C
B No AWS Class •
T S
Description:
AFM 4130 is used to weld heat-treatable, low alloy SAE 4130 and 8630 steels and steel castings with
comparable hardening characteristics.
B L
R Preheat: •
Z Between 400 ~ 600ºF (204 ~ 316ºC), with the same temperature held at interpass, in order to prevent A
cracking.
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240 F
S
V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A M D
S
M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): C

A C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo Standard Packaging: •
G 0.20 1.25 0.40 0.013 0.015 0.50 1.30 0.20 10# Package; 40# Master Carton. I
T AFM 4140 N
S No AWS Class •
T Description: K
AFM 4140 is used for welding SAE 4140 and similar heat-treatable steel where the weld metal must match
the heat treating properties of the parent metal.
A
S
E Preheat: •
R Between 400 ~ 600ºF (204 ~ 316ºC), with the same temperature held at interpass, in order to prevent
E
O cracking.
M Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
S
A Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
•
I Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240
W
N V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A S
M D
S
I Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):
F
N C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Standard Packaging: C
F 0.35 0.80 0.50 0.012 0.014 0.75 0.33 10# Package; 40# Master Carton.
W
O
29
A T
L O
M B
C AFM 4340 C
B No AWS Class •
T S
Description:
AFM 4340 is used for welding heat treatable, high strength steels SAE 4130, 4330, 4340 and steel castings
with similar hardening properties.
B L
R Preheat: •
Z Between 400 ~ 600ºF (204 ~ 316ºC), with the same temperature held at interpass, in order to prevent A
cracking.
T Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): H

I Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm F
Flat 60 ~ 90 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190 200 ~ 240
V&O 50 ~ 80 100 ~ 140 120 ~ 170 N/A
M C
A Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): •
G C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo I
0.35 0.85 0.50 0.011 0.014 0.80 1.80 0.25
T S
N
Standard Packaging: M D
S S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
30
A T
L O
M B
C C
B Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures •
T Preheat & Interpass Post Weld Heat Treatment S
Temperature Temperature
AWS Classification ºF ºC ºF ºC
B E7018-A1 200 ~ 225 93 ~ 107 1,150 ± 25 620 ± 14 L
R E7018-B2L •
Z E8018-B2
300 ~ 375 163 ~ 191 1,275 ± 25 690 ± 14 A
E8018-B3L
E9018-B3
T E8015-B6 H
350 ~ 450 177 ~ 232 1,375 ± 25 740 ± 14
E8016-B6
I •
E8015-B8
T E8016-B8
400 ~ 500 205 ~ 260 1,375 ± 25 740 ± 14 F
E9015-B9
450 ~ 550 232 ~ 288 1,375 ± 25 740 ± 14
E9018-B9
M E8018-C1 C
A 200 ~ 225 93 ~ 107 1,125 ± 25 605 ± 14 •
E8018-C2
G E8018-C3 I
E11018M 200 ~ 250 93 ~ 121 Not Specified
E12018M
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
31
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Wires
C C
B Bare Wires •
AFM RG45 AWS/SFA A5.2 R45 33
AFM RG60 AWS/SFA A5.2 R60 33
B L
R •
Z AFM Product AWS Classification Page A
AFM ER70S-2 AWS/SFA A5.18 ER70S-2 34
T H
I •
T F
AFM Product AWS Classification Page
M AFM ER70S-B2L AWS/SFA A5.28 ER70S-B2L 37 C

A AFM ER80S-B2 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B2 38 •
G AFM ER80S-D2 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-D2 39 I
AFM ER80S-B3L AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B3L 40
AFM ER80S-B6 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B6 41
T AFM ER80S-B8 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-B8 42 N
S AFM ER80S-Ni1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-Ni1 43 •
T AFM ER80S-Ni2 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER80S-Ni2 43 K
AFM ER90S-B3 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER90S-B3 44
A AFM ER90S-B9 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER90S-B9 45
S
E AFM ER100S-1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER100S-1 46
•
R AFM ER110S-1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER110S-1 46
E
O AFM ER120S-1 AWS/SFA A5.28 ER120S-1 47
M [Table 1] Minimum Tension Test Requirements 48 S

A [Table 2] Preheat, Interpass, and Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures 49 •
I General Welding Tips for Low Alloy Wires 50 ~ 51 W
N
I
F
N Click to Download
C
F
W
O
32
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Steel Wire
C AFM RG45 C
B AWS/SFA A5.2 •
T S
AFM RG45 is a copper coated, low carbon steel welding rod used for the welding of steel where the minimum
tensile strength requirement does not exceed 45 ksi (310 MPa).
B Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: L

R C Mn Si P S •
Z 0.08 0.05 0.10 0.035 0.040 A
Cu Cr Ni Mo Al
0.30 0.20 0.30 0.20 0.02
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. H
I •
Standard Packaging & Sizes: S
T M D
F
S
50 Lb Bulk Packages in Diameters:
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm Tension Test Requirements (as welded):
M 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm Not Specified. C
A 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm
•
G I
T AFM RG60 N
S AWS/SFA A5.2 •
T AFM RG60 is used for the oxyfuel gas welding of carbon steels, where the minimum tensile strength K
requirement does not exceed 60 ksi (415 MPa).
A Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods:

C Mn Si P S S
E
0.15 0.90 ~ 1.40 0.10 ~ 0.35 0.035 0.035 •
R
Cu Cr Ni Mo Al E
O
0.30 0.20 0.30 0.20 0.02
All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
M
S
A
Standard Packaging & Sizes: Tension Test Requirements (as welded): •
I
psi 60,000 W
N 50 Lb Bulk Packages in Diameters: Tensile Strength
MPa 400
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm Elongation in 1” Min. (%) 19 Min.
I
3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm S
C
F M D
W
O S
33
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-2 C
B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T S
AFM ER70S-2 is used primarily for singlepass welding of killed, semi-killed, and rimmed steels, but may also
be used for some multipass applications.
Because of the added deoxidants, AFM ER70S-2 can be used for welding steels that have a rusty or dirty
B surface, with a possible sacrifice of weld quality depending on the condition of the surface. L
R Typical specifications for these steels are ASTM A36, A285-C, A515-55 and A516-70, which have •
Z UNS numbers K02600, K02801, K02001, and K02700, respectively. A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods:

T C Mn Si P S Ni Cr H
I 0.07 0.90 ~ 1.40 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.035 (a) (a) •
T Mo V Cu Ti Zr Al F
(a) (a) 0.50 0.05 ~ 0.15 0.02 ~ 0.12 0.05 ~ 0.15
M a. These residual elements shall not exceed 0.50 in total. C
A •
G I
Typical mechanical properties:
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
T MPa 552 N
S psi 65,000 •
Yield Strength
T MPa 450 K
Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 28ft. Lbs
A
S
E
•
R Standard Sizes: E
O 0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.035’ 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
M 0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
A 1/16” 1.6 mm •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
34
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-3 C
B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T S
AFM ER70S-3 is intended for welding singlepass and multi-pass welds.
It provides sufficient deoxidation to allow welding over light mill scale.
Typical base metal specifications are often the same as those for AFM ER70S-2.
B L
R Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: •
Z C Mn Si P S A
0.06 ~ 0.15 0.90 ~ 1.40 0.45 ~ 0.75 0.025 0.035
Ni Cr Mo V Cu
T (a) (a) (a) (a) 0.50 H
I •
T F
a. These residual elements shall not exceed 0.50 in total.
M Typical mechanical properties: C

A psi 78,000 •
Tensile Strength
G MPa 538 I
psi 62,000
Yield Strength
MPa 427
T Elongation in 2” (%) 22 N
S Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 38ft. Lbs •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A
0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm S
E
0.035’ 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
R
0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
1/16” 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
35
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-6 C
B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T S
AFM ER70S-6 is intended for both singleand multi-pass welding.
It is especially suited for sheet metal applications, where smooth weld beads are desired, and structural and
plate steels that have moderate amounts of rust or mill scale.
B L
AFM ER70S-6 withstands high currents with CO2 shielding, even when welding rimmed steels.
R Typical base metal specifications are often the same as those for AFM ER70S-2. •
Z A
C Mn Si P S
T 0.06 ~ 0.15 1.40 ~ 1.85 0.80 ~ 1.15 0.025 0.035
H
I Ni Cr Mo V Cu
•
T (a) (a) (a) (a) 0.50
F

M C
A •
G Typical mechanical properties: I
psi 82,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 566
T psi 66,000 N
Yield Strength
S MPa 485 •
T Elongation in 2” (%) 22 K
Charphy V-Notch @ -20oF 34ft. Lbs
A
S
E Standard Sizes:
•
R 0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
E
O 0.035’ 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
M 1/16” 1.6 mm S
A
•
I 2 Lb. 10 Lb. 30 Lb. 33 Lb. 44 Lb Spools & 550 Lb Drums
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
36
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER70S-B2L C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER70S-B2L is identical to AFM ER80S-B2 except for the low-carbon content (0.05 percent maximum)
and thus the lower strength levels.
It exhibits greater resistance to cracking and is more suitable for welds to be left in the as-welded condition or
B L
when the accuracy of the postweld heat treatment operation is questionable.
R The classification was previously ER80S-B2L. •
Z The strength requirements and classification designator have been changed to reflect the true strength A
capabilities of the chemical composition.
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: H

I C Mn Si P S •
T 0.05 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025 F
Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other
0.20 1.20 ~ 1.50 0.40 ~ 0.65 0.35 0.50
M C
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. •
G Minimum Tension Test Requirements: I
See [Table 1] on Page 48.
T Standard Sizes: N
S 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm •
T 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm K
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
37
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B2 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B2 contains 1/2% molybdenum for increased strength and a high level of deoxidiziers
(Mn and Si) to control porosity when welding with CO2 as the shielding gas.
It will give radiographic quality welds with excellent bead appearance in both ordinary and difficult-to-weld
B L
carbon and low-alloy steels.
R AFM ER80S-D2 exhibits excellent out-of-position welding characteristics with the short circuiting and pulsed •
Z arc processes. A
The combination of weld soundness and strength makes AFM ER80S-D2 suitable for single and multiple-pass
welding of a variety of carbon and low-alloy, higher strength steels in both the as welded and postweld
T heat-treated conditions. H
I •
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: F
C Mn Si P S
0.07 ~ 0.12 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025
M Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other C
A 0.20 1.20 ~ 1.50 0.40 ~ 0.65 0.35 0.50 •
G All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. I
Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

T See [Table 1] on Page 48. N
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
A 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
38
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-D2 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-D2 contains 1/2% molybdenum for increased strength and a high level of deoxidiziers
(Mn and Si) to control porosity when welding with CO2 as the shielding gas.
It will give radiographic quality welds with excellent bead appearance in both ordinary and difficult-to-weld
B L
carbon and low-alloy steels.
R AFM ER80S-D2 exhibits excellent out-of-position welding characteristics with the short circuiting and pulsed •
Z arc processes. A
The combination of weld soundness and strength makes AFM ER80S-D2 suitable for single and multiple-pass
welding of a variety of carbon and low-alloy, higher strength steels in both the as welded and postweld
T heat-treated conditions. H
I •
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: F
C Mn Si P S
0.07 ~ 0.12 1.60 ~ 2.10 0.50 ~ 0.80 0.025 0.025
M Ni Mo Cu Total Other C
A 0.15 0.40 ~ 0.60 0.50 0.50 •
G I
T N
S See [Table 1] on Page 48.
•
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
S
E 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
R 1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
39
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B3L C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B3L is identical to AFM ER90S-B3 except for the low-carbon content (0.05 percent maximum)
and, therefore, the lower strength levels.
It exhibits greater resistance to cracking and is more suitable for welds to be left in the as-welded condition.
B L
AFM ER80S-B3L was previously ER90S-B3L.
R The strength requirements and classification designator have been changed to reflect the true strength •
Z capabilities of the chemical composition. A
Special care must be used when using it in the as-welded condition due to higher strength levels.

I C Mn Si P S •
T 0.05 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025 F
0.20 2.30 ~ 2.70 0.90 ~ 1.20 0.35 0.50
M All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. C
A •
Standard Sizes:
T 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm N
S 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
40
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B6 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B6 contains 4.0 to 6.0 percent chromium and about 0.50 percent molybdenum.
It is used for welding material of similar composition, usually in the form of pipe or tubing.
It is air-hardening material and, therefore, when welding with AFM ER80S-B6, preheat and postweld heat
B L
treatment are required.
R AFM ER80S-B6 is similar to that previously classified as ER502 in AWS A5.9-81. •
Z A
C Mn Si P S
T 0.10 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.50 0.025 0.025 H
I Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other •
T 0.60 4.50 ~ 6.00 0.45 ~ 0.65 0.35 0.50 F
M Minimum Tension Test Requirements: C

A See [Table 1] on Page 48. •
G Standard Sizes: I
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
T N
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
41
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-B8 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-B8 contains 8.0 to 10.5 percent chromium and about 1.0 percent molybdenum.
It is used for welding base metal of similar compositions, usually in the form of pipe or tubing.
It is air-hardening material and, therefore, when welding with AFM ER80S-B8, preheating and postweld heat
B L
treatment are required.
R AFM ER80S-B8 is similar to that previously classified as ER505 in AWS A5.9-81. •
Z A
C Mn Si P S
T 0.10 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.50 0.025 0.025 H
I Ni Cr Mo Cu Total Other •
T 0.50 8.00 ~ 10.50 0.80 ~ 1.20 0.35 0.50 F
M Minimum Tension Test Requirements: C

A See [Table 1] on Page 48. •
G Standard Sizes: I
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
T N
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
42
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER80S-Ni1 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER80S-Ni1 deposits weld metal similar to AFM E8018-C3 electrodes, and is used for welding low-alloy
high-strength steels requiring good toughness at temperatures as low as -50°F (-46°C).
B Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: L
R C Mn Si P S Ni •
Z 0.12 1.25 0.40 ~ 0.80 0.025 0.025 0.80 ~ 1.10 A
Cr Mo V Cu Total Other
0.15 0.35 0.05 0.35 0.50
T H
I •
T Standard Sizes: F
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm See [Table 1] on Page 48.
M 1/16” 1.6 mm S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER80S-Ni2 N
S AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T AFM ER80S-Ni2 deposits weld metal similar to AFM E8018-C1 electrodes. K
Typically, it is used for welding 2-1/2 percent nickel steels and other materials requiring good toughness
at temperatures as low as -80°F (-62°C).
A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: S
E
C Mn Si P •
R
0.12 1.25 0.40 ~ 0.80 0.025 E
O
S Ni Cu Total Other
M 0.025 2.00 ~ 2.75 0.35 0.5
S
I
Standard Sizes: W
N
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
I 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm See [Table 1] on Page 48.
F
N 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
W
O S
43
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER90S-B3 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER90S-B3 is used to weld the 2-1/4Cr-1Mo steels used for high-temperature / high pressure piping and
pressure vessels.
It may also be used for joining combinations of Cr-Mo and carbon steel.
B L
All GMAW modes may be used.
R Careful control of preheat, interpass temperatures, and postweld heat treatment is essential to avoid cracking. •
Z AFM ER90S-B3 is classified after postweld heat treatment. A
Special care must be used when using it in the as-welded condition due to higher strength levels.

I C Mn Si P S •
T 0.07 ~ 0.12 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.025 0.025 F
0.20 2.30 ~ 2.70 0.90 ~ 1.20 0.35 0.50
A •
Standard Sizes:
T 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm N
S 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
44
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER90S-B9 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER90S-B9 is a 9Cr-1Mo solid wire modified with niobium (columbium) and vanadium designed to
provide strength, toughness, fatigue life, oxidation resistance and corrosion resistance at elevated temperatures.
Due to the higher elevated temperature properties of AFM ER90S-B9, components that are now fabricated
B L
from stainless and ferritic steels may be fabricated from a single alloy, eliminating the problems associated with
R dissimilar welds. •
Z A
Applications:
AFM ER90S-B9 is used for welding A213-T91 Tube, A335-P91 Pipe, and A387 Gr. 91 Plate.
T H
I Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: •
T C Mn Si P S Ni Cb (Nb) F
0.07 ~ 0.13 1.25 0.15 ~ 0.30 0.010 0.010 1.00 0.02 ~ 0.10
Mo V Al Cu Cr Total Other
M 0.80 ~ 1.10 0.15 ~ 0.25 0.04 0.20 8.00 ~ 9.50 0.50 C
G I
T Standard Sizes: N
S 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm •
T 0.045’ 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm K
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
45
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER100S-1 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER100S-1 deposits high-strength, very tough weld metal for critical applications.
Originally developed for welding HY80 steels for military applications, it is also used for a variety of structural
applications where tensile strength requirements exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa), and excellent toughness is required
B L
to temperatures as low as -60°F (-51°C).
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: A
C Mn Si P S Ni Cr
0.08 1.25 ~ 1.80 0.20 ~ 0.55 0.010 0.010 1.40 ~ 2.10 0.30
T Mo V Ti Zr Al Cu Total Other H
I 0.25 ~ 0.55 0.05 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 •
T F

M See [Table 1] on Page 48. S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER110S-1 N
S AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T AFM ER110S-1 deposits high-strength, very tough weld metal for critical applications. K
Originally developed for welding HY100 steels for military applications, it is also used for a variety of
structural applications where tensile strength requirements exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa),
A and excellent toughness is required to temperatures as low as -60°F (-51°C). S
E
•
R Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: E
O C Mn Si P S Ni Cr
0.09 1.40 ~ 1.80 0.20 ~ 0.55 0.010 0.010 1.90 ~ 2.60 0.50
M Mo V Ti Zr Al Cu Total Other S
A 0.25 ~ 0.55 0.04 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 •
I
All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. W
N
I Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

See [Table 1] on Page 48. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
46
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER120S-1 C
B AWS/SFA A5.28 •
T S
AFM ER120S-1 deposits high-strength, very tough weld metal for critical applications.
Originally developed for welding HY100 steels for military applications, it is also used for a variety of
structural applications where tensile strength requirements exceed 100 ksi (690 MPa),
B L
and excellent toughness is required to temperatures as low as -60°F (-51°C).
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: A
C Mn Si P S Ni Cr
0.10 1.40 ~ 1.80 0.25 ~ 0.60 0.010 0.010 2.00 ~ 2.80 0.60
T Mo V Ti Zr Al Cu Total Other H
I 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.25 0.50 •
T F

M See [Table 1] on Page 48. C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
47
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B [Table 1] Minimum Tension Test Requirements •
T Tensile Strength Yield Strength
S
AWS Elongation Testing
Shielding Gas*
Classification psi MPa psi MPa (%) Condition
ER70S-B2L 75,000 515 58,000 400 19
B ER80S-B2 80,000 550 68,000 470 19 L
R ER80S-B3L Argon 80,000 550 68,000 540 17 •
Z + A
ER90S-B3 1~5% O2 90,000 620 78,000 470 17 PWHT**
ER80S-B6
80,000 550 68,000 410 17
ER80S-B8
T ER90S-B9 Argon + 5% O2 90,000 620 60,000 470 16 H
I ER80S-Ni1 Argon 80,000 550 68,000 470 24 As-Welded •
T + F
ER80S-Ni2 1 ~5% O2 80,000 550 68,000 470 24 PWHT**
ER80S-D2 CO2 80,000 550 68,000 470 17 As-Welded
M ER100S-1 Argon 100,000 690 88,000 610 16 C
A ER110S-1 + 110,000 760 95,000 660 15 As-Welded •
G ER120S-1 2% O2 120,000 830 105,000 730 14 I
Notes :
* The use of a particular shielding gas for classification purposes shall not be construed to restrict the use of shielding gas mixtures.
T A filler metal tested with other gas blends, such as Argon/O2 or Argon/CO2 may result in weld metal having different strength N
and elongation.
S Classification with other gas blends shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and supplier. •
T K
** Postweld heat-treated condition in accordance to Table 2.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
48
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B [Table 2] Preheat, Interpass, and Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures •
T Preheat and Interpass Temperature* PWHT Temperature*
S
AWS Classification
°F °C °F °C
ER70S-B2L
B 275 ~ 325 135 ~ 165 1,150 ± 25 620 ± 15 L
ER80S-B2
R ER80S-B3L •
Z 375 ~ 425 185 ~ 215 1,275 ± 25 690 ± 15 A
ER90S-B3
ER80S-B6 350 ~ 450 177 ~ 232 1,375 ± 25 745 ± 15
ER80S-B8 400 ~ 500 205 ~ 260 1,375 ± 25 745 ± 15
T ER90S-B9 300 ~ 500 150 ~ 260 1,375 ± 25 745 ± 15 H
I ER80S-Ni2 275 ~ 325 135 ~ 165 1,150 ± 25 620 ± 15 •
T ER80S-Ni1 F
ER80S-D2
ER100S-1 275 ~ 325 135 ~ 165 None** None**
M ER110S-1 C
A ER120S-1 •
G Notes :
I
* These temperatures are specified for testing under this specification and are not to be considered as recommendations
for preheat, interpass, and postweld heat treatment in production welding. The requirements for production welding
must be determined by the user. They may or may not differ from those called here.
T N
S ** These classifications are normally used in the as-welded condition •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
49
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B General Welding Tips for Low Alloy Wires •
T S
I. Gas Metal Arc Welding (GMAW)
Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) can be divided into four categories based on the mode of metal transfer:
B (1) spray, (2) pulsed spray, (3) globular, and (4) short circuiting transfer. L
R In the spray, pulsed spray, and globular modes, transfer occurs as distinct droplets that are detached from •
Z the electrode, transferring along the arc column into the weld pool. In the short circuiting mode, the metal deposited A
during frequent short circuiting of the electrode in the molten pool.
II. Spray Transfer

T The spray transfer mode, for low-alloy steel, is most commonly obtained with argon shielding gas mixtures with up to H
I 5 percent oxygen or carbon dioxide. •
A characteristic of these shielding gas mixtures is the smooth arc plasma through which hundreds of very fine
T droplets are transferred to the weld pool each second. F
Spray transfer with argon-oxygen or argon-carbon dioxide shielding gas is, primarily, a function of current density,
polarity, and resistance heating of the electrode.
M The high droplet rate (approximately 250 droplets per second) develops suddenly above a critical current level, C
commonly referred to as the transition current (for each size electrode).
A Below this current, the metal is transferred in drops generally larger in diameter than the electrode at a rate of from •
G 10 to 20 per second (globular transfer). I
The transition current is also dependent, to some extent, on the chemical composition of the electrode.
For 1/16 (1.6mm) diameter low-alloy steel electrodes, a transition current of 270 amperes (direct current electrode
positive [DCEP]) is common.
T Alternating current is not recommended for this type of welding because it does not produce a stable arc. N
S •
T III. Pulsed Spray Transfer K
Metal transfer in pulsed spray welding is similar to that of the spray transfer described above, but it occurs at a lower
average current.
A The lower average current is made possible by rapid pulsing of the welding current between a high level, where metal
will transfer rapidly in the spray mode, and a low level, where no transfer will take place. S
E At a typical rate of 60 to 120 pulses per second, a melted drop is formed by the low-current arc, which is then •
R “squeezed off ” by the high-current pulse.
E
O This permits all-position welding.
(continued on next page)

M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
50
A T
L O
M B
Low Alloy Wires
C C
B General Welding Tips for Low Alloy Wires •
T S
IV. Globular Transfer
The mode of transfer that charcterizes 100 percent CO2 as a shielding gas is globular.
B Common practice with globular transfer is to use low arc voltage to minimize spatter. L
R This buries the arc and produces deep penetration. •
Z Electrodes of 0.045 and 1/16 in. (1.2 mm and 1.6 mm) diameter normally are used at welding currents in the range of A
275 – 400 amperes (DCEP), for this type of transfer. The rate at which droplets (globules) are transferred ranges from
20 to 70 per second, depending on the size of the electrode, the amperage, polarity, and arc voltage.
T V. Short Circuiting Transfer H

I This mode of transfer is obtained with small diameter electrodes (0.030 to 0.045 in. [0.8 to 1.2 mm]) using low arc •
voltages and amperages, and a power source designed for short circuiting transfer.
T The electrode short-circuits to the weld metal, usually at a rate of from 50 to 200 times per second.
F
Metal is transferred with each short circuit, but not across the arc.
Short circuiting gas metal arc welding of low-alloy steel is done most commonly with mixtures of argon and CO2
M as the shielding gas, with CO2 alone, and occasionally with mixtures of helium-argon-CO2. C
Penetration of welds made with CO2 shielding gas is greater than with argon-CO2 mixtures, but mixtures containing
A substantial amounts of argon or helium generally result in superior weld metal impact properties.
•
G Shielding gas mixtures of 50 to 90 percent argon-remainder CO2 or 50 to 90 percent helium-remainder CO2 result in I
higher short circuiting rates and lower minimum currents and voltages than does CO2 shielding alone.
This can be an advantage when welding thin plate or in the achievement of superior impact properties.
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
51
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Electrodes & Wires
C C
B Hardfacing Coated Electrodes •
AFM 300 - 53
B AFM 700 - 54 L
R AFM 800 - 55 •
Z NO AWS/SFA Classification A
AFM 900 - 56
AFM CHROM-CARB - 57
T AFM Sugar Rod - 58 H

I •
T F
Hardfacing Wires
M AFM Product AWS Classification Page C
A AFM 250 - 59
•
G I
AFM 300 - 60
AFM 350 - 61
NO AWS/SFA Classification
T AFM 450 - 62 N
S •
AFM 600 - 63
T K
AFM 700 - 64
A
S
E
•
R Hardfacing Conversion Chart 65
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N Please contact us
for MSDS
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
52
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Electrodes
C
B
AFM 300 C
•
AC/DC+ (Electrode Positive)
T RC 26-31 S
Description:
B AFM 300 is a buildup and overlaying electrode for all ferrous metals subjected to moderate abrasion, L
R severe impact and corrosion. •
Weld deposits of AFM 300 are strong and tough, however with an average hardness of Rc 26-31,
Z A
they do remain machinable.
Applications:
T Typical applications include tractor rollers, sprockets, idlers, concrete mixer blades, bearing journals and H
I other parts which require machinable weld deposits. •
T F
Procedure:
Clean the weld area. Use AC or DC+ polarity.
M Preheating is not required, although heavier sections should be preheated to 200-300°F. C
Maintain a medium arc length and use a weaving technique or stringer beads up to twice the diameter of
A •
the electrode.
G Avoid the buildup of heat at any one location on the base metal. I
Remove slag between passes and allow the base metal to air cool.
If severe abrasion is encountered, a final pass of AFM 800 should be considered.
T N
S Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): •
T Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4” K
Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm
AMPS 60 ~ 130 120 ~ 180 170 ~ 240 240 ~ 300
A
S
E
Typical Chemical Composition (%): •
R
C Si Mn Cr E
O
0.20 0.60 1.48 0.70
M
S
A
I
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. W
N 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
53
A T
L O
M B
C AFM 700 C
B AC/DC+ (Electrode Positive) •
T RC 58-62 S
Description:
B AFM 700 is a severe abrasion and considerable impact hardfacing electrode. L
R Weld deposits have a martensitic structure that resists wear even in metal-to-metal mild steel contact. •
When used in the flat and horizontal positions, this electrode will exhibit a stable arc and produce weld
Z A
deposits that are very smooth and finely rippled.
Applications:
T Typical applications for AFM 700 include plowshares, cultivator shoes, bucket teeth and lips, well drilling H
I bits, cement mixer blades, shovel tracks and screw conveyors. •
T F
Procedure:
Use AC or DC+. Preheating is generally not required.
M Using the weaving technique and keeping a short arc length, deposit up to 1/4” maximum. C
If more than two passes will be required, it is suggested that a “padding layer” of AFM 300 be used prior to
A •
depositing AFM 700.
G I
Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+):

T Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4” N
S Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm •
T AMPS 110 ~ 130 140 ~ 170 180 ~ 210 220 ~ 300 K
A
Typical Chemical Composition (%): S
E
C Si Mn Cr •
R
0.48 0.80 1.45 4.40 E
O
M
S
A Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. •
I
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
54
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM 800 C
•
T RC 62-65 S
Description:
B AFM 800 is a hardsurfacing electrode used for severe abrasion, light impact, and corrosion resistance. L
R This electrode produces an extremely hard martensite-structure weld deposit which is not machinable in •
the “as-welded” condition.
Z A
AFM 800 will lay down a smooth, corrosion resistant weld deposit which will remain extremely hard even
at elevated temperatures.
T Applications: H
I Typical applications for AFM 800 include mill hammers, bucket teeth, valve seats, mixers, crusher rolls, •
T tamper rollers, and other mild steel, carbon or alloy steels as well as manganese steels. F
Procedure:
M Use AC or DC+. Preheating is not required except on alloy steels. Using a short gap and a weaving C
technique, deposit two layers.
A •
If more than two passes are required, use AFM 300 to provide a padding layer prior to using AFM 800.
G I

T Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4” N
S Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm •
T AMPS 90 ~ 130 140 ~ 170 190 ~ 240 220 ~ 300 K
A
E
C Si Mn Cr •
R
1.40 0.50 1.23 6.80 E
O
M
Standard Packaging: S
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
55
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM 900 C
•
T RC 50-55 (After Workhardening) S
Description:
B AFM 900 is a hardsurfacing overlay electrode used for the fabrication and build up of high manganese and
L
alloy steels which are subjected to heavy impact and severe abrasion.
R The weld deposits have an austenitic structure and work harden although remaining extremely ductile. •
Z Weld deposits are machinable and forgeable. A
Applications:
T Typical applications of AFM 900 include repairing railroad switches, frogs and tracks, bucket teeth and lips, H
I rock crushers, mill hammers and bulldozer parts. •
T F
Procedure:
When the base metal of 13% manganese steel is hardened, cut-off the hardened zone before welding.
Welding should be done at the lowest possible temperature. Maintain a short to medium arc length using
M a slight weaving technique to make the deposit smooth and even. C
A Water or air cool the weld metal during welding. •
G Do not preheat manganese steels. Do not overheat the base metal. I
Peening is recommended to relieve stresses.
T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): N

S Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” 1/4”
•
T Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm 6.4 mm
K
AMPS 75 ~ 130 120 ~ 190 175 ~ 240 230 ~ 280
A
S
E
R
C Si Mn E
O
0.70 0.30 12.50
M
S
A
I All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. W
N 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
56
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM Chrom-Carb C
•
T RC 58-62 S
Description:
B AFM Chrom-Carb is a chromium-tungsten flux-coated hardsurfacing electrode designed to produce L
R extremely hard weld metal deposits on parts exposed to severe mineral abrasion with low impact. •
The extreme hardness of AFM Chrom-Carb deposits is achieved through the formation of chromium and
Z A
tungsten carbides within the matrix of the weld deposit.
Applications:
T Typical applications include earth moving and rock crushing equipment, augers, asphalt feed screws, sand H
I pumps, mixer blades and crushing or pulverizing mills.parts which require machinable weld deposits. •
T F
Procedure:
Maintain a short arc length and hold the electrode vertical to the work piece.
M AFM Chrom-Carb can be used on both AC or DC machines. Excellent for hardfacing large surface areas C
using wide weave beads.
A •
AFM Chrom-Carb has good operator appeal and yields a very smooth weld bead with superb adherence.
G Deposition is fast and the weld deposits will last a long time. I
T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): N

S Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm K
AMPS 70 ~ 90 110 ~ 130 160 ~ 190 220 ~ 250
A
E
C Cr W •
R
4.00 26.00 4.00 E
O
M
A All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. •
I 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
57
A T
L O
M B
C
B
AFM Sugar Rod C
•
T RC 57-61 (As Welded) S
Description:
B AFM SUGAR ROD is designed for use on carbon and low alloy steels, manganese steels, and cast iron. De-
L
posits take a high polish, which contributes to high frictional and abrasion wear qualities, especially small
R particle abrasion. •
Z Excellent on applications that need impact as well as abrasion resistance. A
Provides optimum resistance to this combination.
Deposits well out of position.
T H
I Applications: •
T AFM SUGAR ROD is recommended for severe abrasion applications, along with moderate impact. F
This alloy has a good hot hardness up to approximately 1000°F.
Especially designed for crusher applications.
Used heavily in construction, mining, brick and clay industries on parts such as crusher rolls, jaw crushers,
M bucket teeth, edges, hammers, mill hammers, conveyor screws, etc. C
A •
G I
Dia. (inch) 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm N
S AMPS 80 ~ 125 100 ~ 160 125 ~ 190 •
T K
Typical All Weld Metal Chemistry (%):

A C Mn Si S P Ni Cr Mo Cu S
E 3.10 0.01 0.95 0.029 0.021 0.09 31.08 0.02 0.09 •
R
E
O
M Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. S
A 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
58
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 250 C
•
Build-Up
T RC 20 ~ 26 S
Description:
AFM 250 is for building-up mild and low alloy steel parts to within 3/16”-3/8” of their original size.
B Weld deposits will be part ferritic-part martensitic in structure. L
R AFM 250 weld deposits have good compressive strength and resistance to plastic deformation. •
Z Weld deposits are easily machined in the “as welded” position. A
An excellent underlayment prior to hardsurfacing.
Very good impact resistance; poor abrasion resistance.
T H
I Applications: •
AFM 250 Underlaying for hardsurfacing, steel mill wobblers and pads, shafting, small rolls, pump parts.
T F
Procedure:
Use DC Reverse Polarity (electrode positive).
M The shielding gas should be 100% CO2 welding grade, however a 75% Argon + 25% CO2 mixture will increase C
A the hardness slightly. •
G Superior properties are achieved if an interpass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. I
Electrode
T Wire Diameter
Stick-out
AMPS Volts* N
S 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26
•
T K
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
• Ideal procedure is to set the wire feed speed and find the voltage setting that will yield the smoothest performance.
A
S
E Typical Chemical Composition (%): •
R C Si Mn Cr Fe E
O 0.07 0.50 1.59 1.30 Bal.
M
A
0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool •
I
1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
N Other sizes and packaging are available.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
59
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 300 C
•
Build-Up
T RC 28 ~ 32 S
Description:
AFM 300 is similar to AFM 250 in weld deposit structure and uses.
B AFM 300 offers a slightly harder weld deposit than AFM 250 and subsequently it is often used in applications L
R where a hardsurfacing layer is not applied over the AFM 300 deposit. •
Z Very good impact resistance; poor abrasion resistance. A
Applications:
T Build-up of power shovels and tractor parts, repairing battered rail, hammers. H
I •
T Procedure: F
The shielding gas should be 100% CO2 welding grade, however a 75% Argon + 25% CO2 mixture will increase
the hardness slightly.
M Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. C
A •
G Electrode
I
Wire Diameter AMPS Volts*
Stick-out
0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26
T N
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
S •
T • Ideal procedure is to set the wire feed speed and find the voltage setting that will yield the smoothest performance. K
A Typical Chemical Composition (%):

C Si Mn Cr Fe S
E
0.09 0.68 1.54 1.10 Bal. •
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
M 0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool
1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool S
A
Other sizes and packaging are available. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
60
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 350 C
•
Build-up & Hardsurfacing
T RC 34 ~ 39 S
Description:
B AFM 350 has a low alloy deposit that is martensitic in structure. L
R It is machinable and forgeable. •
A good balance of impact resistance and abrasion resistance as well as hardness make AFM 350 an excellent
Z A
choice where only one wire is desired for build-up and hardsurfacing.
(Not to be used as an underlayment prior to subsequent hardfacing).
Very good impact resistance; fair abrasion resistance.
T H
I Applications: •
T Overlaying carbon steel shafts, gear teeth, sprockets, steel shovel pads. F
Procedure:
M Use DC Reverse Polarity (electrode positive). C
A •
G Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. I
Wire Electrode
T AMPS Volts* N
Diameter Stick-out
S 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 •
T K
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
A
S
E
R
C Si Mn Cr Mo Fe E
O
0.12 0.45 1.37 1.30 0.20 Bal.
M
S
A
I 0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
N 1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool
Other sizes and packaging are available.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
61
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 450 C
•
Hardsurfacing
T RC 34 ~ 39 S
Description:
B AFM 450 is designed for metal to metal abrasion involving impact such as rolling or sliding parts in earth L
R moving equipment where lubrication is not possible. •
The weld deposits of AFM 450 are martensitic in structure.
Z A
Very good impact resistance; good abrasion resistance.
Applications:
T Mine car wheels, brake drums, tractor rollers, undercarriage parts, shovel idlers, rollers, and hook rolls. H
I •
T Procedure: F
M the hardness slightly. C
Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained.
A •
G I
Wire Electrode
AMPS Volts*
Diameter Stick-out
T 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 N
S 1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28 •
T K
A
E
C Si Mn Cr Mo Fe •
R
0.24 0.51 1.20 2.00 0.60 Bal. E
O
M
A
0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool •
I
1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
62
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 600 C
•
Hardsurfacing
T RC 53 ~ 56 S
Description:
B AFM 600 offers high abrasion and heavy impact resistance on carbon, low alloy and manganese steel. L
R Weld deposits are martensitic and corrosion resistant. •
AFM 600 is designed for metal to metal and metal to earth abrasion.
Z A
Weld deposits will work harden when put to service.
Excellent impact resistance; excellent abrasion resistance.
T Applications: H
I Extruder screws, bucket lips, tamper feet, tillage tools, dredge parts, ore drag lines, muller tires, and •
T wherever high abrasion and heavy pounding is encountered. F
Procedure:
M Use DC Reverse Polarity (electrode positive). C
A •
G Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. I
T Electrode N
S Stick-out •
T 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 K
1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28
A • Ideal procedure is to set the wire feed speed and find the voltage setting that will yield the smoothest performance.
S
E
•
R Typical Chemical Composition (%):
E
O C Si Mn Cr Mo Fe
0.25 2.18 0.36 6.50 0.03 Bal.
M
S
A Standard Packaging: •
I 0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
N 1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool
Other sizes and packaging are available.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
63
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Wires
C
B
AFM 700 C
•
Hardsurfacing
T RC 58 ~ 61 S
Description:
B AFM 700 offers a harder weld deposit than AFM 600, but lacks the corrosion resistance.
L
Primarily used for high metal to metal abrasion.
R Weld deposits are martensitic in structure and will work harden when put into service. •
Z Excellent impact resistance; excellent abrasion resistance. A
Applications:
T Rollers, conveyor screws, crusher rolls, and mill hammers. H
I •
T Procedure: F
M Superior properties are achieved if an inter pass temperature of 300° ~ 480°F is maintained. C
A •
G I
Electrode
Stick-out
T 0.045” (1.2 mm) 1/2” ~ 3/4” 150 ~ 250 21 ~ 26 N
S 1/16” (1.6 mm) 3/4” ~ 1” 250 ~ 350 23 ~ 28 •
T K
A
E
C Si Mn Cr W Fe •
R
0.30 2.40 0.50 7.00 0.70 Bal. E
O
M
A
0.045’ (1.2 mm) X 25 Lb Spool •
I 1/16” (1.6 mm) X 25 Lb Spool W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
64
A T
L O
M B
Hardfacing Conversion Chart
C C
B Build-Up & Hardfacing Gas Shielded Wires
•
T WELDING
S
AFM STOODY POSTLE HOBART McKAY LINCOLN
ALLOYS
AFM 250 BUILD-UP 2891 SPL BU-O BU-O BU B-O / B-S
B L
R AFM 300
SUPER BU, 107 2892 SPL 40-0 242-0 35-S, 40-S T-O / T-S •
AFM 350
Z A
AFM 450 105 - 50-S 252 - R-O / R-S
AFM 600
965 2898 SPL 960 960 55 L-G
T AFM 700 H
I •
T Build-Up & Hardfacing Stick Electrodes F
AFM MESSER(MG) McKAY CERTANIUM EUTECTIC HOBART STOODY
M HARDALLOY TUFANHARD C
AFM 300 740 297 2B BUILD-UP LH
A 32, 42 250, 320 •
G I
6710, 6712,
CHROM CARB 790 55 TIC - - SUPER 20
6715, N112
5005/6006
T AFM 700 770 55 6006 N102,
TUFANHARD
35/HXC N
580
S SUGARTEC A •
T HARDALLOY TUFANHARD K
AFM 800 760 267 N2 21 / 1105
58 550, 600
A
AFM 900 745
CHROM/MAG,
282, 298 OA 690, 40 150 NICROMANG S
E HARDALLOY 119
•
R
AFM SUGAR E
O ROD
765 HARDALLOY 140 284 7000, N102 - 21 / 2134
M The information contained above represents a comparable alternative for the products of American Filler Metals and is not necessarily equal in
chemistry or operating characteristics to the other products shown. S
A Depending upon the application, the final decision on which product to use should be made by the customer. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
65
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Coated Electrodes & Wires
C C
B Coated Electrodes •
AFM NI-55 AWS/SFA A5.15 ENiFe-CI 68
AFM NI-99 AWS/SFA A5.15 ENi-CI 69
B L
R •
Z Bare Wires A
AFM NI-55 NO AWS/SFA Classification - 70
T H
AFM NI-99 AWS/SFA A5.15 ERNi-CI 71
I •
T F
M Please contact us C
for MSDS
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
66
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Coated Electrodes & Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.15 •
T S
Designates an electrode.
Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal

B or undiluted metal. L
R •
Designates that these filler metal are intended for
Z cast iron applications.
A
E NiFe-CI
T H
I •
T F
Designates an electrode or rod.
M Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal C

A or undiluted metal. •
G I
Designates that these filler metal are intended
for cast iron applications.
T ERNi-CI N
S •
T K
A
S
E
Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal •
R or undiluted metal. E
O
Designates a tubular electrode.
M
S
A Designates that the electrode is used primarily
without an external shielding gas. •
I
W
N Designates that these filler metal are intended
or cast iron applications.
I
E NiFeT3-CI F
N
C
F
W
O
67
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Electrode
C AFM NI-55 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiFe-CI •
T AC or DC+ (Reverse Polarity) S
Description:
AFM NI-55 is designed for welding cast iron, malleable iron and ductile iron to themselves and other
B wrought alloys, including nickel alloys. L
R A core wire chemistry of approximately 55% nickel and 45% iron produces weld deposits with much lower •
Z weld shrinkage stress which in turn reduces the possibility of weld or heat-affected zone cracking. A
Applications:
T AFM NI-55 is especially suited for welding heavy sections such as motor blocks, housings, machine parts, H
frames, defective castings and building up worn sections.
I Stringer deposits are generally harder to machine due to the dilution of the weld metal, however heavier beads
•
T and multiple layer welds will exhibit good machinability. F

M Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” C
A Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
G Length 12” 14” 14” 14” I
AC 55 ~ 65 70 ~ 85 110 ~ 125 135 ~ 150
DC + 50 ~ 70 70 ~ 95 100 ~ 130 135 ~ 170
T N
S Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
T C Mn Si S Fe Ni* Cu** Al Total Other
K
2.00 2.50 4.00 0.03 Bal. 45 ~ 60 1.00 1.00 1.00
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S
E * Nickel plus incidental Cobalt. •
R ** Copper plus incidental Silver.
E
O
Typical Mechanical Properties of Undiluted Weld Metal: AFM NI-55 is also available in
M psi 58,000 ~ 84,000 a bare MIG and TIG wire.
Tensile Strength S
A MPa 400 ~ 579 See page 71.
•
I Elongation (%) 6 ~ 18
W
N
I Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. F
N
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. S
C
F M D
W
O S
68
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Electrode
C
B
AFM NI-99 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.11 ENi-CI
T AC or DC+ (Reverse Polarity) S
Description:
B AFM NI-99 is designed for welding thin sections of cast iron to itself or to low alloy and carbon steels. L
This all-position electrode is used where maximum machinability is required.
R The weld deposits are “soft” and can be drilled, tapped, milled or shaped.
•
Z A
Applications:
AFM NI-99 is especially suited for repairing porous or cracked castings and can be used to weld cast iron
T to itself or dissimilar metals. H
I •
T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
M Length 12” 14” 14” 14” C
A AC 60 ~ 90 90 ~ 140 140 ~ 190 150 ~ 200 •
G DC + 50 ~ 80 80 ~ 130 100 ~ 170 120 ~ 190 I
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):

T C Mn Si S Fe Ni* Cu** Al Total Other N
S 2.00 2.50 4.00 0.03 8.00 85 Min. 2.50 1.00 1.00 •
T K
* Nickel plus incidental Cobalt.
A ** Copper plus incidental Silver.
S
E
•
R Typical Mechanical Properties of Undiluted Weld Metal:
AFM NI-99 is also available in E
O psi 40,000 ~ 65,000
Tensile Strength a bare MIG and TIG wire.
MPa 276 ~ 488
See page 72.
M Elongation (%) 3~6
S
A
•
I
N All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
69
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Wire
C C
B AFM NI-55 •
T Description: S
AFM NI-55 is a bare MIG and TIG alloy for the welding of cast iron.
It has a harder weld than AFM NI-99, but machining can be accomplished by using carbide tipped tools.
B A 350°F minimum preheat and interpass temperature is recommended during welding. L
R •
Z Typical Chemical Analysis (%): A
C Mn Si Fe Ni
0.05 0.25 0.15 43.60 55.90
T For AFM NI-55 stick electrodes see page 69. H
I •
T Typical Mechanical Properties: F
psi 105,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 720
M Elongation (%) 35 C
A •
G Standard Sizes: I
36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
T 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm N
S 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
T 5/32” 4.0 mm K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
70
A T
L O
M B
Cast Iron Wire
C
B
AFM NI-99 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.15 ERNi-CI
T S
Description:
AFM NI-99 is a bare MIG and TIG alloy for the welding of cast iron.
It is a machinable alloy that can also be used for buildup and overlay.
B L
A 350°F minimum preheat and interpass temperature is recommended during welding.
R •
Z Typical Chemical Analysis (%): A
C Mn Si Ni
0.05 0.22 0.05 99.60
T H
For AFM NI-99 stick electrodes see page 70.
I •
T F
psi 66,500
Tensile Strength
M MPa 450 C
A Elongation (%) 40 •
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm N
S •
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
T K
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
71
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes & Wires
C C
B Nickel Coated Electrodes •
AFM 112 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-3 74
AFM 117 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrCoMo-1 75
B AFM 122 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-10 76 L
R AFM 141 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENi-1 77 •
Z AFM 182 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-3 78 A
AFM 187 AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuNi 79
AFM 190 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCu-7 80
T H
AFM C276 AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-4 81
I •
AFM A AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-2 82
T F
M Nickel Wires C
A AFM Product AWS Classification Page •
G AFM 60 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCu-7 83 I
AFM 61 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNi-1 84
AFM 62 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-5 85
T AFM 67 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNi 86 N
S AFM 82 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCr-3 87 •
T AFM 92 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-6 88 K
AFM 601 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-11 89
A AFM 617 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrCoMo-1 90
S
E AFM 622 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-10 91
•
R AFM 625 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-3 92
E
O AFM C276 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-4 93
AFM 718 AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiFeCr-2 94
M AFM ALLOY X AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-2 95 S
A AFM ALLOY W AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiMo-3 96 •
I
W
N
I
Click to Download Click to Download F
N Nickel Electrodes Nickel Wires C
F
W
O
72
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes & Wires
C C
B •
T S
AWS/SFA A5.11
B Designates an electrode. L
R •
Z A
Designates the electrodes as nickel-based alloys.
Designates the group of electrodes according to

T their principal alloying elements. H
I •
These numbers are separate one composition from another,
T within a group, and are not repeated within that group.
F
M
E NiCu-7 C
A •
G I
T N
S Order of Mandatory Classification Designators •
AWS/SFA A5.14
T K
Designates an electrode and rod.
A
S
E Designates the electrodes as nickel-based alloys. •
R
E
O Designates the group of electrodes according to
their principal alloying elements.
M
These numbers are separate one composition from another, S
A within a group, and are not repeated within that group.
•
I
W
N ERNiCu-7
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
73
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 112 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrMo-3 •
T DC+ (Reverse Polarity) S
Description:
AFM 112 is designed for welding alloy 625 to itself and for joining many dissimilar nickel baring alloys and
B iron-base metals.
L
R AFM 112 is also recommended for welding nickel base alloys 600 and 601 and nickel-iron-chrome alloys 800 •
Z and 801. A
It also can be used for joining nickel based alloys 625, 718, X750 and 706 to 9% nickel steel and for overlaying
carbon steel.
T H
I Recommended Amperage (DC+): •
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 40 ~ 65 65 ~ 90 90 ~ 125 125 ~ 160 C
A •
G I
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
0.10 1.00 7.0 0.03 0.02 0.75 0.50
T N
Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta Mo Total Other
S •
55.00 Min. (a) 20.00 ~ 23.00 3.15 ~ 4.15 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50
T K
*Includes incidental Cobalt.
A (a) Cobalt - 0.12 % Maximum, when specified by the purchaser. S
E
•
R
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: E
O
psi 110,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 760
M
Elongation (%) 30 S
A
•
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
I
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
74
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 117 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrCoMo-1 •
Description:
AFM 117 is designed for use on nickel chromium-cobalt-molybdenum alloys (alloy 617) to themselves and
B to steel and for surfacing steel with nickel-chromium-cobalt-molybdenum weld metal (alloy 600, 601, & 800). L
R AFM 117 is also used for applications where optimum strength and oxidation resistance is required above •
Z 1500°F up to 2100°F, especially when welding on base metals of nickel-iron-chromium alloys. A
Recommended Amperage (DC+):

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 40 ~ 60 75 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 125 ~ 150
M Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): C

A C Mn Fe P S Si Cu •
G 0.05 ~ 0.15 0.30 ~ 2.50 5.0 0.03 0.015 0.75 0.50 I
Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta Mo Total Other
Bal. 9.00 ~ 15.00 21.00 ~ 26.00 1.00 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50
T N
S All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. •
T K
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements:
A psi 90,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 620
•
R Elongation (%) 25
E
O
Standard Packaging:
M All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. S
A 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton.
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
75
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 122 C
Description:
AFM 122 is used for welding nickel chromium-molybdenum alloys, for the welding of the clad side of joints
B in steel clad with nickel chromium-molybdenum alloy, to steel and to their nickel-base alloys; and for joining L
R nickel chromium-molybdenum alloys. •
Z Typical specifications for the nickel-chromium molybdenum base metals have UNS Number N06022. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 40 ~ 60 75 ~ 100 90 ~ 130 125 ~ 150
M C
A •
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
G I
0.02 1.00 2.00 ~ 6.00 0.03 0.015 0.20 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Other
Bal. 2.50 20.00 ~ 22.50 12.50 ~ 14.50 0.35 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50
T N
T K
A psi 90,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 620
•
R Elongation (%) 25
E
O
Standard Packaging:
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
76
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 141 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENi-1 •
Description:
AFM 141 is used for welding commercially pure nickel to itself, for overlaying nickel on steel, and for joining
B nickel to steel. L
R AFM 141 is commonly used in applications with nickel alloys 200 and 201. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
T Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm H
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 65 ~ 85 90 ~ 125 125 ~ 170 170 ~ 225 F

A C Mn Fe P S Si •
G 0.10 0.75 0.75 0.03 0.02 1.25 I
Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other
0.25 92.00 Min. 1.00 1.00 ~ 4.00 0.50
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. N
S *Includes incidental Cobalt. •
T K
psi 60,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 410 S
E
Elongation (%) 20 •
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
M All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
77
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 182 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-3 •
Description:
AFM 182 is a coated electrode designed to weld nickel-chromium alloys, the clad side of
B nickel-chromium-iron clad steel and for welding iron and nickel-base alloy dissimilar metal combinations L
R such as nickel 600, 601, and 800. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 40 ~ 65 65 ~ 95 95 ~ 125 125 ~ 165 F

M C Mn Fe P S Si Cu C
A 0.10 5.00 ~ 9.50 10.00 0.03 0.015 1.00 0.50 •
G Ni* Co Ti Cr Nb + Ta Total Other I
52.00 Min. (a) 1.00 13.00 ~ 17.00 1.00 ~ 2.50** 0.50
(a) Cobalt - 0.12 Maximum, when specified by the purchaser.
T * Ni - Includes incidental cobalt.
N
S ** Tantalum - 0.30 Maximum, when specified by the purchaser. •
T K
A psi 80,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 550 •
R Elongation (%) 30
E
O
A
6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
78
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 187 C
B AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuNi •
Description:
AFM 187 is an all position copper-nickel core electrode.
B AFM 187 is excellent for welding wrought or cast 70/30, 80/20, and 90/10 copper-nickel alloys and dissimilar L
R applications of nickel-copper alloys. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 60 ~ 85 70 ~ 120 100 ~ 145 130 ~ 190 F

M Mn Fe Si Ni* Cu C
A 1.00 ~ 2.50 0.40 ~ 0.75 0.50 29.0 ~ 33.0 Bal. •
G P Pb Ti Total Other I
0.020 0.02 0.20 0.50
T * Includes cobalt.
N
S •
T K
psi 50,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 350 S
E Elongation (%) 20 •
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
79
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM 190 C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCu-7 •
Description:
AFM 190 is an electrode designed to weld nickel-copper to itself, such as alloy 400 and 404.
B It is also used to overlay nickel-copper alloy on steel and to weld dissimilar nickel-copper alloys to steel. L
R •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T H
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
I •
AMPS 55 ~ 75 75 ~ 110 110 ~ 150 150 ~ 190
T F

M C Mn Fe P S Si C
A 0.10 4.00 2.50 0.02 0.015 1.50 •
G Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other I
Bal. 62.00 ~ 69.00 0.75 1.00 0.50
T * Includes incidental cobalt.
N
S •
T K
psi 70,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 480 S
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
80
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM C276 C
Description:
AFM C276 is used for welding low-carbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy, for welding the clad side
B of joints in steel clad with lowcarbon nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy, and for welding low-carbon L
R nickel-chromium-molybdenum alloy to steel and to other nickel base alloys. •
Z AFM C276 electrodes normally are used only in the flat position. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 40 ~ 75 70 ~ 110 80 ~ 125 80 ~ 130
M C
A Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
G C Mn Fe P S Si Cu I
0.02 1.00 4.00 ~ 7.00 0.04 0.03 0.20 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Other
T Bal. 2.50 14.50 ~ 16.50 15.00 ~ 17.00 0.35 3.00 ~ 4.50 0.50 N
S All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
•
T * Includes incidental cobalt. K
A All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements:

psi 100,000 S
E Tensile Strength
MPa 690 •
R
Elongation (%) 25 E
O
M
A
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
81
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Electrodes
C AFM A C
B AWS/SFA A5.11 ENiCrFe-2 •
Description:
AFM A is an electrode used for welding nickel-chromium-iron alloys (alloy 800), 9% nickel steel,
B and a variety of dissimilar metal joints (involving carbon steel, stainless steel, nickel, and nickel-base alloys). L
R The base metals can be wrought or cast (welding grade), or both. •
Z The electrodes may be used for applications at temperatures ranging from cryogenic to around 1800°F A
(980°C).
However, for temperatures above 1500°F (820°C), weld metal produced by AFM A does not exhibit optimum
oxidation resistance and strength.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M C
AMPS 40 ~ 75 70 ~ 110 80 ~ 125 80 ~ 130
A •
G I
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
0.10 1.00 ~ 3.50 12.00 0.03 0.02 0.75 0.50
T N
Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta** Mo Total Other
S •
62.00 Min. (a) 13.00 ~ 17.00 0.50 ~ 4.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 0.50
T K
a. Cobalt-0.12 maximum, when specified by the purchaser.
A * Includes incidental cobalt.
S
E ** Tantalum-0.30 maximum, when specified by the purchaser.
•
R
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: E
O
psi 100,000
Tensile Strength
M MPa 690
Elongation (%) 25 S
A
•
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I 6 containers per 60 Lb Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
82
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 60 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCu-7
T S
Description:
AFM 60 is a titanium bearing filler metal for gas shielding welding of nickel-copper alloys,
(alloy 400 and 404) and dissimilar welding applications including joining alloy 200 and copper-nickel alloys
B using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and PAW processes. L
R AFM 60 contains sufficient titanium to control porosity with these welding processes. •
Z AFM 60 can also be used for a MIG overlay on steel after using AFM 61 for the first layer. A
Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 190 ENiCu-7.

T Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): H
I C Mn Fe P S Si •
T 0.15 4.00 2.50 0.03 0.015 1.25 F
Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other
Bal. 62.00 ~ 69.00 1.25 1.50 ~ 3.00 0.50
M C
* Includes incidental cobalt.
G I
Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.):
psi 70,000
T Tensile Strength N
MPa 480
S •
Elongation (%) 30
T K
Standard Sizes:
A
36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool S
E
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm •
R
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm E
O
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
M 5/32” 4.0 mm
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
83
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 61 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNi-1
T S
Description:
AFM 61 is used for welding wrought and cast forms of commercially pure nickel alloy (alloy 200 and 201)
to itself using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and PAW processes.
B AFM 61 contains sufficient titanium to control weld-metal porosity with these welding processes. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 141 ENi-1. A

T C Mn Fe P S Si H
I 0.15 1.00 1.00 0.03 0.015 0.75 •
T Cu Ni* Al Ti Total Other F
0.25 93.00 Min. 1.50 2.00 ~ 3.50 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt. C
A •
G Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): I
psi 60,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 410
T Elongation (%) 20 N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm S
E
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm •
R
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm E
O
5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
84
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 62 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrFe-5
T S
Description:
AFM 62 is used for welding nickel-chromiumiron alloy (600) to itself using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and
PAW processes.
B The higher niobium content of AFM 62 is intended to minimize cracking where high welding stresses are L
R encountered, as in thick-section base metal up to 2”. •
Z A
C Mn Fe P S Si
T H
0.08 1.00 6.00 ~ 10.00 0.03 0.015 0.35
I •
Cu Ni* Co Cr Nb + Ta Total Other
T F
0.50 70.00 Min. (a) 14.00 ~ 17.00 1.50 ~ 3.00 0.50
a. Co is 0.12 maximum when specified by the purchaser.
A •
G I
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
T MPa 550 N
S Elongation (%) 30 •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm S
E
•
R 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
E
O 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
85
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 67 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNi
T S
Description:
With the addition of nickel, AFM 67 strengthens the weld metal and improves the corrosion resistance,
particularly against salt water.
B The weld metal has good hot and cold ductility. L
R AFM 67 is used for welding 70/30, 80/20, and 90/10 copper-nickel alloys. •
Z To MIG overlay on steel, first overlay with a layer of AFM 61. A
It is also used for dissimilar welding of alloy 200 to copper-nickel alloys.
When gas tungsten or gas metal arc welding with AFM 67, preheating is not required.
T Welding is done in all positions. H
The arc should be kept as short as possible to assure adequate shielding gas coverage and thus minimize
I •
porosity.
T F
Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.6 is AFM 187 ECuNi.

A Cu* Mn Fe Si Ni** •
G Bal. 1.00 0.40 ~ 0.75 0.25 29.00 ~ 32.00 I
S P Pb Ti Total Others
0.01 0.02 0.02 0.20 ~ 0.50 0.50
T N
S •
* Including silver
T ** Includes incidental cobalt K

A
psi 50,000 S
E Tensile Strength
MPa 345 •
R
Elongation (%) 20 E
O
M Standard Sizes:
S
A 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
•
I 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
W
N 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
I 5/32” 4.0 mm
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
86
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 82 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCr-3
T S
Description:
AFM 82 is designed for welding nickelchromium-iron alloy (600) to itself, for the clad side of joints in steel
with nickel-chromium-iron alloy, for surfacing steel with nickel-chromiumiron weld metal, for dissimilar
B welding of nickelbase alloys (600, 601 & 800), and for joining steel to nickel-base alloys. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 182 ENiCrFe-3. A
C Mn Fe P S Si
T H
0.10 2.50 ~ 3.50 3.00 0.03 0.015 0.50
I •
Ni* Ti Cr Nb + Ta Cu Total Others
T F
67.00 Min. 0.75 18.00 ~ 22.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt, Co is 0.12 when specified by the purchaser. C
A •
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 550
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
87
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 92 C
•
T S
Description:
AFM 92 is used for cladding steel with nickel-chromiumiron weld metal and for joining steel to nickel-base
alloys using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and PAW processes.
B The weld metal will age harden on heat treatment. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM A ENiCrFe-2. A

T C Mn Fe P S Si H
I 0.08 2.00 ~ 2.70 8.00 0.03 0.015 0.35 •
T Ni* Ti Cr Cu Total Others F
67.00 Min. 2.50 ~ 3.50 14.00 ~ 17.00 0.50 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt C
A •
psi 80,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 550
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm S
E 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm •
R 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm E
O 5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
88
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 601 C
•
T S
Description:
AFM 601 is used for welding nickelchromium-iron-aluminum alloy (601) to itself and to other high
temperature compositions using the GTAW process.
B It is used for severe applications where the exposure temperature can exceed 2100°F (1150°). L
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): A
C Mn Fe P S Si
0.10 1.00 Bal. 0.03 0.015 0.50
T Cu Ni* Al Cr Total Others
H
I 1.00 58.0 ~ 63.0 1.00 ~ 1.70 21.00 ~ 25.00 0.50
•
T F
M C
A Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): •
G psi 94,000 I
Tensile Strength
MPa 650
Elongation (%) 42
T N
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
A
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
89
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 617 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrCoMo-1
T S
Description:
AFM 617 is used for welding nickelchromium-cobalt-molybdenum alloy to itself using the GTAW and
GMAW processes.
B AFM 617 can also be used for welding joints of dissimilar steels and for elevated temperature service. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 117 ENiCrCoMo-1. A
T C Mn Fe P S Si Cu H
I 0.05 ~ 0.15 1.00 3.00 0.03 0.015 1.00 0.50 •
T Ni* Co Al Ti Cr Mo Total Others
F
Bal. 10.00 ~ 15.00 0.80 ~ 1.50 0.60 20.00 ~ 24.00 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50
A •
psi 90,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 620
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
•
R 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
E
O 5/32” 4.0 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
90
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 622 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiCrMo-10
T S
Description:
AFM 622 is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy (622) to itself, to steel, to other nickel-
base alloys (such as 625 & C276), and for cladding steel with nickelchromium- molybdenum weld metal using
B the GTAW, GMAW, and PAW processes. L
R •
Z Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 122 ENiCrMo-10. A

I 0.015 0.50 2.00 ~ 6.00 0.02 0.010 0.08 0.50 •
T Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Others F
Bal. 2.50 20.00 ~ 22.50 12.50 ~ 14.50 0.35 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50
A •
psi 100,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 690
S •
T Standard Sizes: K
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
A
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
91
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 625 C
•
T S
Description:
AFM 625 is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy (625) to itself, to steel, to other nickel-
base alloys (601 & 800), for cladding steel with nickel-chromiummolybdenum weld metal, and for welding
B the clad side of joints in steel with nickel-chromiummolybdenum alloy using the GTAW, GMAW, SAW, and L
R PAW processes. •
Z AFM 625’s outstanding strength and toughness in the temperature range cryogenic to 2000°F (1093°C) are A
derived primarily from the solid solution effects of the refractory metals, columbium and molybdenum,
in a nickel-chromium matrix.
T AFM 625 has excellent fatigue strength and stress-corrosion cracking resistance to chloride ions. H
I •
Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM 112 ENiCrMo-3.
T F
C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
M 0.010 0.50 5.00 0.02 0.015 0.50 0.50 C
A Ni* Al Ti Cr Nb + Ta Mo Total Others •
G 58.00 Min. 0.40 0.40 20.00 ~ 23.00 3.15 ~ 4.15 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.50 I
T N
S Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): •
T psi 110,000 K
Tensile Strength
MPa 760
A Elongation (%) 30
S
E
•
R Standard Sizes: E
O 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
M 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm S
A 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
I 5/32” 4.0 mm W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
92
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM C276 C
•
T S
Description:
AFMC 276 is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy (C276) to itself, to steel, to other
nickel-base alloys, and for cladding steel with nickel-chromium-molybdenum weld metal using the GTAW
B and GMAW processes. L
R AFM C276 has exceptional corrosion resistance to a wide variety of chemical processing environments •
Z including strong reducing environments, chloride-contaminated media, chlorine, and sea water. A
AFM C276 has excellent resistance to pitting and stress-corrosion cracking.
T Corresponding Classification in AWS A5.11 is AFM C276 ENiCrMo-4. H

I Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
T C Mn Fe P S Si Cu
F
0.02 1.00 4.00 ~ 7.00 0.04 0.03 0.08 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Others
M C
Bal. 2.50 14.50 ~ 16.50 15.00 ~ 17.00 0.35 3.00 ~ 4.50 0.50
A •
T Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): N

S psi 100,000 •
Tensile Strength
T MPa 690 K
Elongation (%) 25
A
Standard Sizes: S
E
36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool •
R
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm E
O
3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
M 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
93
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM 718 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiFeCr-2
T S
Description:
AFM 718 is used for welding nickelchromium-niobium-molybdenum alloy (718) to itself using the GTAW
processes.
B AFM 718 is a precipitation hardenable nickel-base alloy designed to display exceptionally high yield, tensile L
R and creep-rupture properties at temperatures up to 1300°F (704°C). •
Z The sluggish age-hardening response of AFM 718 permits annealing and welding without spontaneous A
hardening during heating and cooling.
AFM 718 has excellent weldability when compared to the nickel-base superalloys hardened by aluminum and
T titanium. H
I Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
T C B Mn Fe P S Si F
0.08 0.003 0.35 Bal. 0.015 0.015 0.35
Cu Ni* Al Ti Cr Nb + Ta Mo
M 0.30 50.00 ~ 55.00 0.20 ~ 0.80 0.65 ~ 1.15 17.00 ~ 21.00 4.75 ~ 5.50 2.80 ~ 3.30 C
A Total Others All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
•
G 0.50 * Includes incidental cobalt. I
T Typical As-Welded Tensile Strength (Min.): N

S psi 165,000 •
Tensile Strength
T MPa 1140* K
Elongation (%) 25
* Age-hardened condition: Heat treated at 1325°F
A (718°C) for 8 hours, then furnace cooled to 1150°F
(620°C) at 100°F (56°C) per hour, held for 8 hours, S
E
then air cooled. •
R
E
O
Standard Sizes:
M 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
S
A 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
•
I 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
W
N 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
5/32” 4.0 mm
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
94
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM Alloy X C
•
T S
Description:
AFM ALLOY X is used for welding nickelchromium-molybdenum alloy to itself, to steel, to other nickel-
base alloys, and for cladding steel with nickel-chromium-molybdenum weld metal using the GTAW, GMAW,
B and PAW processes. L
R AFM ALLOY X is a nonmagnetic, heat and corrosion resistant, nickel-base alloy. •
Z It derives its exceptional properties, up to 2200°F (1200°C), from solid solution strengthening. A

I 0.05 ~ 0.15 1.00 17.00 ~ 20.00 0.04 0.03 1.00 0.50 •
T Ni* Co Cr Mo W Total Others F
Bal. 0.50 ~ 2.50 20.50 ~ 23.00 8.00 ~ 10.00 0.20 ~ 1.00 0.50
M * Includes incidental cobalt.
C
A •
psi 95,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 660
T N
S Standard Sizes: •
T 36” TIG Wire 30 Lb ~ 33 Lb Spool
K
1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm
A 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm
S
E 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
•
R 5/32” 4.0 mm
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
95
A T
L O
M B
Nickel Wire
C
B
AFM Alloy W C
•
AWS/SFA A5.14 ERNiMo-3
T S
Description:
AFM ALLOY W is used for weld repair of various nickel-, cobalt-, and iron-base alloys and for dissimilar
joining applications of nickel-, cobalt-, and iron-base alloys.
B L
R Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
Z C Mn Fe P S Si Cu A
0.12 1.00 4.00 ~ 7.00 0.04 0.03 1.00 0.50
Ni* Co Cr Mo V W Total Others
T Bal. 2.50 4.00 ~ 6.00 23.00 ~ 26.00 0.60 1.00 0.50 H
I •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
F

M psi 100,000 C
A Tensile Strength •
MPa 690
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 1/16” 1.6 mm 0.035” 0.9 mm N
S 3/32’ 2.4 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm •
T 1/8” 3.2 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
K
5/32” 4.0 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
96
A T
L O
M B
Stainless Steel Electrodes
C C
B Stainless Steel Coated Electrodes •
AFM E308-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E308-16 99
AFM E308H-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E308H-16 100
B AFM E308L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E308L-16 101 L
R AFM E309-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309-16 102 •
Z AFM E309L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309L-16 103 A
AFM E309Nb-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309Nb-16 104
AFM E309Mo-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309Mo-16 105
T H
AFM E309LMo-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E309LMo-16 106
I •
AFM E310-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E310-16 107
T F
AFM E312-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E312-16 108
AFM E316-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E316-16 109
M AFM E316H-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E316H-16 110 C

A AFM E316L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E316L-16 111 •
G AFM E317L-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E317L-16 112 I
AFM E320-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E320-16 113
AFM E320LR-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E320LR-16 114
T AFM E330-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E330-16 115 N
S AFM E347-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E347-16 116 •
T AFM E385-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E385-16 117 K
AFM E410-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E410-16 118
A AFM E410NiMo-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E410NiMo-16 119
S
E AFM E2209-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E2209-16 120
•
R AFM E2553-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E2553-16 121
E
O AFM E2594-16 AWS/SFA A5.4 E2594-16 122
M
S
A
•
I
W
N Click to Download
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
97
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T Order of Mandatory Classification Designators S
AWS/SFA A5.4
B L
R •
Z Designates the classification as to its composition. A
Designates the classification as to usability with respect
to position of welding & type of current.
T - Please see below “Usability Designation”. H
I •
T F
E 308-16
• Welding Current
M DCEP - Direct Current Electrode Positive (DC, Reverse Polarity) C
A •
G I
Usability Designation
T Usability Designation -15. N

The electrodes are usable with dcep (electrode positive) only.
S While use with alternating current is sometimes accomplished, they are not intended to qualify for use with this type of current.
•
T Electrode sizes 5/32 in [4.0 mm] and smaller may be used in all positions of welding. K
Usability Designation -16.
A The covering for these electrodes generally contains readily ionizing elements, such as potassium, in order to stabilize the arc for
welding with alternating current. S
E Electrode sizes 5/32 in [4.0 mm] and smaller may be used in all positions of welding.
•
R
Usability Designation -17. E
O The covering of these electrodes is a modification of the -16 covering in that considerable silica replaces some of the titania of
the -16 covering.
M Since both the -16 and the -17 electrode coverings permit ac operation, both covering types were classified as -16 in the past
because there was no classification alternative until the 1992 revision of AWS A5.4. S
A However, the operational differences between the two types have become significant enough to warrant a separate classification. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
98
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E308-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E308-16 is used for welding austenitic stainless of 18/8 types such as AISI 201, 202, 204, 301, 302, 304,
B 305, and 308. L
R •
Z Recommended Amperage (DC+): A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” H
I AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
T F
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.08 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50 C
A Si P S Cu •
G 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 I
T All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: N

S •
psi 80,000
T Tensile Strength
MPa 550
K
Elongation (%) 35
A
S
E Standard Packaging: •
R All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers. E
O 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
99
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E308H-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E30H8-16 is the same as AFM E308-16 except that the allowable carbon content has been restricted
B to the higher portion of the E308 range. L
Carbon content in the range of 0.04 ~ 0.08 provides higher tensile and creep strengths at elevated
R temperatures.
•
Z AFM E308H-16 is used for welding Type 304H base metal. A

T H
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I •
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T F
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.04 ~ 0.08 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 N
S •
T K
A psi 80,000
Tensile Strength S
E MPa 550
•
R Elongation (%) 35
E
O
A
4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
100
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E308L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E308L-16 has the same composition of the weld metal of AFM E308-16, except for the restricted
B carbon content. L
The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of weld metal deposited by AFM E308L-16 reduces the possibility
R of intergranular carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without
•
Z the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or titanium. A
A carbon content of 0.04 percent maximum has been shown to be adequate in weld metal, even though it is
recognized that similar base metal specifications require a 0.03 percent limitation. This low carbon alloy,
T however, is not as strong at elevated temperature as the columbium-stabilized alloys or 304H. H
I •
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
M Length 12” 14” 14” 14” C
A AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
G I

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn N
S 0.04 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S Cu K
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.

S
E
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
R
psi 75,000 E
O Tensile Strength
MPa 520
M Elongation (%) 35
S
A
•
I
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
101
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309-16 is commonly used for welding similar alloys in wrought or cast form.
It is used for welding dissimilar metals, such as joining Type 304 to carbon steel, welding the clad side of
B L
Type 304 clad steels, and applying stainless steel sheet linings to carbon steel shells.
R Occasionally, AFM E309-16 is used to weld Type 304 and similar base metals where severe corrosion •
Z conditions exist requiring higher alloy weld metal. A

T H
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I •
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T F
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.15 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 N
T K
A Tensile Strength
psi 80,000
S
E MPa 550
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
102
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309L-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309-16 electrodes, except for
B the restricted carbon content. L
The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of these weld deposits reduces the possibility of intergranular
R carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of
•
Z stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) and titanium. A
AFM E309L-16 is not as strong at elevated temperature as the columbiumstabilized alloys or high carbon
content AFM E309-16 deposits.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 C
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.04 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
T N
Si P S Cu
S •
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T K
A All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: S

E psi 75,000
Tensile Strength •
R MPa 520 E
O Elongation (%) 30
M
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
103
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309Nb-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309Nb-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309-16, except for
B the addition of columbium (niobium) and a reduction in the carbon limit. L
The columbium (niobium) provides resistance to carbide precipitation and thus increases intergranular
R corrosion resistance and also provides higher strength in elevated temperature service.
•
Z AFM E309Nb-16 electrodes are used also for welding Type 347 clad steels or for the overlay of carbon A
steel.
T E309Nb-XX was formerly named E309Cb-XXw. H

I The change was made conform to the worldwide uniform designation of the element nobium. •
T F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
M Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm C
A Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
G AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 I

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn N
S 0.12 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S Cu Nb (Cb) + Ta K
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 0.70 ~ 1.00
S
E
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
R
psi 80,000 E
O Tensile Strength
MPa 550
M Elongation (%) 30
S
A
•
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
104
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309Mo-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309Mo-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309-16, except for
B the addition of molybdenum and a small reduction in the carbon limit. L
It is used for welding Type 316 clad steels or for the overlay of carbon steels.
R •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T H
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
I •
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
T F
M C Cr Ni Mo Mn C
A 0.12 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
•
G Si P S Cu
I
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
S All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
T psi 80,000 K
Tensile Strength
MPa 550
A Elongation (%) 30
S
E
•
R Standard Packaging: E
O All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
105
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E309LMo-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E309LMo-16 has the same composition of weld metal deposited by AFM E309Mo-16, except for
the restricted carbon content.
B The lower carbon content of the weld metal reduces the possibility of itergranular corrosion. L
R •
Z E309LMo-XX was formerly named E309MoL-XX. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
A •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
G I
0.12 22.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 520 S
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
106
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E310-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E310-16 is used for welding type 310 stainless steel. The weld deposit exhibits the same chemical
analysis and oxidation resistance as the base plate metal.
B L
R •
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” H
I AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
T F
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.08 ~ 0.20 25.00 ~ 28.00 20.00 ~ 22.50 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50 C
A Si P S Cu •
G 0.75 0.03 0.03 0.75 I
T All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: N

S psi 80,000
•
T Tensile Strength
MPa 550
K
Elongation (%) 30
A
S
R All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
E
O 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
107
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E312-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E312-16 was originally designed to weld cast alloys of similar composition.
They have been found to be valuable in welding dissimilar metals, high in nickel.
B AFM E312-16 gives a two-phase weld deposit with substantial amounts of ferrite in an austenitic matrix. L
R Even with considerable dilution by austenite-forming elements, such as nickel, the microstructure remains •
Z two-phase and thus highly resistant to weld metal cracks and fissures. A
Applications should be limited to service temperature below 800°F (420°C) to avoid formation of secondary
brittle phases.
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): H
I Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.15 28.00 ~ 32.00 8.00 ~ 10.50 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 N
S •
T K
A Tensile Strength
psi 95,000
S
E MPa 660
•
R Elongation (%) 22
E
O
Standard Packaging:
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
108
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E316-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E316-16 is used for welding Type 316 and similar alloys.
They have been used successfully in certain applications involving special base metals for high-temperature
B service. L
R The presence of molybdenum provides creep resistance at elevated temperatures. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 F

M C Cr Ni Mo Mn C
A 0.08 17.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
G Si P S Cu I
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
S •
T K
psi 75,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 520
A Elongation (%) 30
S
E
•
R
Standard Packaging: E
O All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
109
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E316H-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E316H-16 is used for welding 316H base metal. It is the same as AFM E316-16 except that
the allowable carbon content has been restricted to the higher portion of the E316 range.
B Carbon content in the range of 0.04 to 0.08 provides higher tensile and creep strengths at elevated L
R temperatures. •
Z A
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
I Length 12” 14” 14” 14” •
T AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 F

M C Cr Ni Mo Mn C
A 0.04 ~ 0.08 17.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 •
G Si P S Cu I
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. N

S •
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 520 S
R
E
O Standard Packaging:
M 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
110
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E316L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E316L-16 has the same composition as AFM E316-16, except for the restricted carbon content.
The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of weld metal deposited by these electrodes reduces the possibility
B of intergranular carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without L
R the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or titanium. •
Z AFM E316L-16 is used principally for welding low carbon, molybdenum-bearing austenitic alloys. A
Tests have shown that 0.04 percent carbon limit in the weld metal gives adequate protection against
intergranular corrosion in most cases.
AFM E316L-16, however, is not as strong at elevated temperatures as Type 316H.
T H
I •
T F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M C
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.04 17.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50 N
S Si P S Cu •
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 K
A
S
E All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: •
R psi 70,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 490
Elongation (%) 30
M
S
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
111
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E317L-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E317L-16 is usually used for welding alloys of similar composition and are utilized in severely
corrosive environments (such as those containing haolgens) where crevice and pitting corrosion are of
B concern. L
R The 0.04 percent maximum carbon content of weld metal deposited by these electrodes reduces the possibility •
Z of intergranular carbide precipitation and thereby increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without A
the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or titanium.
AFM E317L-16, however, is not as strong at elevated temperatures as the columbium (niobium)-stabilized
alloys or the standard Type 317 weld metal with a higher carbon content.
T H
I •
T F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M C
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.04 18.00 ~ 21.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 3.00 ~ 4.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
N
S Si P S Cu
•
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
K

A
S
R psi 75,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 520
Elongation (%) 30
M
S
A
•
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
112
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E320-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E320-16 is primarily used to weld base metals of similar composition, such as alloy 20,
for applications where resistance to severe corrosion is required for a wide range of chemicals including
B sulfuric and sulfurous acids and their salts. L
R They can be used to weld both castings and wrought alloys of similar composition without postweld heat •
Z treatment. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
A •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
G I
0.07 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 0.50 ~ 2.50
Si P S Cu Nb (Cb) + Ta
0.60 0.04 0.03 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. 1.00 Max.
T N
T K
psi 80,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 550 S
E
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
S
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
113
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E320LR-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E320LR-16 weld metal deposits have the same basic composition as that deposited by AFM E320-16;
however, the elements of C, Si, P, and S are specified at lower maximum levels, and Cb (Nb) and Mn are
B controlled within narrower ranges. L
R These changes reduce the weld metal fissuring (while maintaining the corrosion resistance) frequently •
Z encountered in fully austenitic stainless steel weld metals. A
Consequently, welding practices typically used to deposit ferrite-containing austenitic stainless steel weld
metals can be used.
AFM E320LR-16 has a lower minimum tensile strength than AFM E320-16.
T H
I •
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): F
Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16”
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
M Length 12” 14” 14” 14” C
A AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.03 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.50 ~ 2.50 N
S Si P S Cu Nb (Cb) + Ta •
T 0.30 0.020 0.015 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. 0.40 Max. K
A
S
R psi 75,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 520
Elongation (%) 30
M
S
A
I
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
114
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E330-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
The nominal composition of the weld metal is 35 Ni, 15.5 Cr. AFM E330-16 is commonly used where
heat-and scale-resisting properties above 1800°F (980°C) are required.
B However, highsulfur environments may adversely effect performance at elevated temperature. L
R Repairs of defects in alloy castings and the welding of castings and wrought alloys of alloy 330 are the most •
Z common applications. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180

A C Cr Ni Mo Mn •
G 0.18 ~ 0.25 14.00 ~ 17.00 33.00 ~ 37.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 I
Si P S Cu
1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 520 S
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
115
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E347-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
The nominal composition of this weld metal is 19.5 Cr, 10 Ni with Cb (Nb) or Cb (Nb) plus Ta added as
a stabilizer.
B Either of these additions reduces the possibility of intergranular chromium carbide precipitation and thus L
R increases resistance to intergranular corrosion. •
Z AFM E347-16 is usually used for welding alloys 347 and 321. A
It is commonly used where maximum resistance to corrosion is required.
T Recommended Amperage (DC+): H

I Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” •
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180
M C
A •
G Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.08 18.00 ~ 21.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 0.50 ~ 2.50
T Si P S Cu N
S 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. K

A
psi 75,000 S
E Tensile Strength
MPa 520 •
R
Elongation (%) 30 E
O
M Standard Packaging: S
A All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
•
I 4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton.
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
116
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E385-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E385-16 is used primarily for welding Type 904L materials for the handling of sulphuric acid and many
chloride-containing media.
B AFM E385-16 also may be used to join Type 317L material where improved corrosion resistance in specific L
R media is needed. •
Z It can also be used for joining Type 904L base metal to other grades of stainless. The elements C, Si, P and S are A
specified at lower maximum levels to minimize weld metal hot cracking and fissuring (while maintaining
corrosion resistance) frequently encountered in fully austenitic weld metals.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 50 ~ 80 70 ~ 110 100 ~ 140 130 ~ 180 C
A •
G Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.03 19.50 ~ 21.50 24.00 ~ 26.00 4.20 ~ 5.20 1.00 ~ 2.50
T Si P S Cu
N
S 0.90 0.03 0.02 1.20 ~ 2.00
•
T K
A All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: S

E psi 75,000
Tensile Strength •
R MPa 520
E
O Elongation (%) 30
M
A
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
117
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E410-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
This 12 Cr alloy is an air-hardening steel.
Preheat and postheat treatments are required to achieve welds adequate ductility for many engineering
B purposes. L
R AFM E410-16 is most commonly used to weld alloy 410, but also 403, 405, 414, 416 and 420 alloys. •
Z It is also used for surfacing of carbon steels to resist corrosion, erosion, or abrasion. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 75 80 ~ 115 115 ~ 160 150 ~ 210

A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
G 0.12 11.00 ~ 13.50 0.70 0.75 1.00
I
Si P S Cu
0.90 0.04 0.03 0.75
T N
T K
psi 75,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 450 S
R
E
O Heat Treatment:
Heat to 1350 to 1400°F(730 to 760°C), hold for one hour, furnace cool at a rate of 100°F(60°C) per hour
M to 600°F(315°C) and air cool to ambient.
S
A
•
I
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
118
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E410NiMo-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E410NiMo-16 is used for welding ASTM CA6NM castings or similar materials, as well as light gage
Type 410, 410S, and 405 base metals.
B Weld metal deposited by AFM E410NiMo-16 is modified to contain less chromium and more nickel than weld L
R metal deposits by AFM E410-16. •
Z The objective is to eliminate ferrite in the microstructure, as ferrite has a deleterious effect on mechanical A
properties of this alloy. Final postweld heat treatment should not exceed 1150°F (620°C).
Higher temperatures may result in rehardening due to untempered martensite in the microstructure after
cooling to room temperature.
T H
T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” F
Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm
Length 12” 14” 14” 14”
M AMPS 50 ~ 75 80 ~ 115 115 ~ 160 150 ~ 210 C
A •
G I
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.06 11.00 ~ 12.50 4.00 ~ 5.00 0.40 ~ 0.70 1.00 N
S Si P S Cu •
T 0.90 0.04 0.03 0.75 K
A
All-Weld-Metal Tension Test Requirements: S
E
•
R psi 110,000
Tensile Strength E
O MPa 760
Elongation (%) 15
M
Heat Treatment: S
A
Heat to 1100 to 1150°F (595 to 620°C), hold for one hour, and air cool to ambient. •
I
W
N
Standard Packaging:
I All sizes are packaged in 10 Lb containers.
4 containers per 40 Lb Master Carton. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
119
A T
L O
M B
Stainless Steel Electrode
C AFM E2209-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E2209-16 is used primarily to weld duplex stainless steels which contain approximately 22 percent of
chromium (grade 2205).
B Weld metal deposited by AFM E2209-16 has “duplex” microstructure consisting of an austenite-ferrite matrix. L
R It combines increased tensile strength with improved resistance to pitting corrosive attack and to stress •
Z corrosion cracking. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 80 80 ~ 120 100 ~ 160 150 ~ 210
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.04 21.50 ~ 23.50 8.50 ~ 10.50 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50 ~ 2.00
Si P S N Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.08 ~ 0.20 0.75 N
T K
psi 100,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 690 S
E
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
120
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E2553-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
AFM E2553-16 is primarily used to weld duplex stainless steels which contain approximately 25 percent of
chromium.
B Weld metal deposited by AFM E2553-16 has “duplex” microstructure consisting of an austenite-ferrite matrix. L
R It combines increased tensile strength with improved resistance to pitting corrosive attack and to stress •
Z corrosion cracking. A

T Dia. (inch) 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” 3/16” H
I Dia. (mm) 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm 4.8 mm •
T Length 12” 14” 14” 14” F
AMPS 50 ~ 75 80 ~ 115 115 ~ 160 150 ~ 210
M C
G C Cr Ni Mo Mn I
0.06 24.00 ~ 27.000 6.50 ~ 8.50 2.90 ~ 3.90 0.50 ~ 1.50
Si P S N Cu
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.10 ~ 0.25 1.50 ~ 2.50 N
S •
T K
psi 100,000
A Tensile Strength
MPa 760 S
E
R
E
O
Standard Packaging:
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
121
A T
L O
M B
C AFM E2594-16 C
B AWS/SFA A5.4 •
T S
Description:
Superduplex grade 2594 electrodes provide matching chemistry and mechanical property characteristics
to wrought superduplex alloys such as 2507 and Zeron 100 as well as superduplex casting alloys (ASTM A890).
B The welding wire is overalloyed 2 - 3 percent in Nickel to provide the optimum ferrite/austenite ratio L
R in the finished weld. This structure results in high tensile/yield strength and superior resistance to SCC •
Z and pitting corrosion. A
Typical Chemical Composition (%):
T C Mn Si Fe Cr Ni H
I 0.02 1.00 1.00 Bal. 25.50 9.25 •
T Cu Mo S/P N PREN F
0.50 3.90 0.01 / 0.025 0.250 40 Min.
M C
A Typical Mechanical Properties of Weld Metal: •
G psi 130,000 I
Tensile Strength
MPa 900
psi 101,000
T Yield Strength N
MPa 695
S Elongation 4 D (%) 31 •
T Reduction of Area (%) 50 K
Impact @ 20 o C > 27 J
A Hardness HRC* 28 ~ 30
S
E * Meets NACE MRO 175w
•
R
E
O Standard Packaging:
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
122
A T
L O
M B
Click to Download
Stainless Steel Wires
C C
B •
T S
AFM ER308 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308 125
AFM ER308H AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308H 125
B AFM ER308L AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308L 126 L

R AFM ER308LSi AWS/SFA A5.9 ER308LSi 126 •
Z AFM ER309 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER309 127 A
AFM ER309L AWS/SFA A5.9 ER309L 127
AFM ER309LSi AWS/SFA A5.9 ER309LSi 128
T AFM ER310 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER310 128 H
I AFM ER312 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER312 129 •
T AFM ER316 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER316 129 F
AFM ER316H AWS/SFA A5.9 ER316H 130
M C
AFM ER316LSi AWS/SFA A5.9 ER316LSi 131
A •
G I
T AFM ER347Si AWS/SFA A5.9 ER347Si 133 N

S AFM ER320 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER320 133 •
T AFM ER320LR AWS/SFA A5.9 ER320LR 134 K
AFM ER385 (904L) AWS/SFA A5.9 ER385 134
AFM ER409Nb AWS/SFA A5.9 ER409Nb 135
A
AFM ER410 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER410 135 S
E
AFM ER410NiMo AWS/SFA A5.9 ER410NiMo 136 •
R
AFM ER420 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER420 136 E
O
M AFM ER630 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER630 137
S
A AFM ER2209 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER2209 138
•
I AFM ER2594 AWS/SFA A5.9 ER2594 139
W
N Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wires 140 ~ 141
I Welding Tips for Stainless Steel 142 F

N Welding Tips for Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wires 143 C
F
W
O
123
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T Order of Mandatory Classification Designators S
AWS/SFA A5.9
Designates solid wires that maybe used as electrodes or rods.

B L
R •
Z Designates the normal chemical composition of the filler metal. A
Denotes carbon content restricted to the upper part of the range

T that is specified for the standard grade of the specific filler H
metal.
I •
T F
ER 308H
M C
A •
G Denotes carbon content restricted to the lower part of the range I
that is specified for the corresponding grade of filler metal.
T ER 308L N
S •
T K
Denotes low residuals.

A
S
E
•
R ER 308LR E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
124
A T
L O
M B
Stainless Steel Wire
C AFM ER308 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER308 is used for welding alloys 18-8, 19-9, and 20-10 such as AISI 201, 202, 204, 301, 302,
& 304 grades.
B It is most often used to weld base metals of similar composition, in particular, Type 304. L
R •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.08 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
T Si P S N Cu H
I 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER308H N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER308, except that the allowable carbon content has been restricted to
the higher portion of the 308 range.
A Carbon content in the range of 0.04-0.08 provides higher strength at elevated temperatures
S
E AFM ER308H is used for welding 304H base metal.
•
R
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): E
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.04 ~ 0.08 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.50 1.00 ~ 2.50
M
Si P S N Cu S
A
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
I
W
N All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
125
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER308L C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
This classification is the same as AFM ER308, except for the carbon content.
Low carbon (0.03 percent max.) in AFM ER308L reduces the possibility of intergranular carbide precipitation.
B This increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium L
R (niobium) or titanium. •
Z Strength of AFM ER308L, however, is less than that of the columbium (niobium)-stabilized alloys or A
AFM ER308H at elevated temperatures.
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): H

I C Cr Ni Mo Mn •
T 0.03 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 F
Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER308LSi N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER308L, except for the higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the filler metal in the gas metal arc welding process.
A If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity of
S
E the weld is somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal.
•
R
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.03 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
M
Si P S N Cu S
A
0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
I
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
126
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER309 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER309 is used to weld alloy 309.
Occasionally, it is used to weld Type 304 and similar base metals where severe corrosion conditions exist
B requiring higher alloy weld metal. L
R It is also used in dissimilar metal welds, such as joining Type 304 to carbon steel, welding the clad side of •
Z Type 304 clad steels, and applying stainless steel sheet linings to carbon steel shells. A

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn H
I 0.12 23.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S N Cu F
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER309L N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER309, except for the carbon content. Low carbon (0.03 percent max.)
in AFM ER309L reduces the possibility of intergranular carbide precipitation.
A This increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium
S
E (niobium) or titanium.
Strength of AFM ER309L, however, may not be as great at elevated temperatures as that of the columbium •
R
(niobium)-stabilized alloys or AFM ER309. E
O
M C Cr Ni Mo Mn S
A 0.03 19.50 ~ 22.00 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 •
I Si P S N Cu W
N 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
I All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.

F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
127
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER309LSi C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
The classification is the same as AFM ER309L, except for higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the filler metal in the gas metal arc welding processes.
B If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity of L
R the weld is somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal. •
Z A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.12 23.00 ~ 25.00 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
T H
Si P S N Cu
I •
0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
T F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER310 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER310 is used for welding 310 stainless.
It is also used for welding 304 clad and stainless overlay on mild and carbon steels.
A It provides high strength and scaling resistance at elevated temperatures.
S
E
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): •
R
C Cr Ni Mo Mn E
O
0.08 ~ 0.15 25.00 ~ 28.00 20.00 ~ 22.50 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
M Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 S
A
•
I All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
128
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER312 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER312 was originally designed to weld cast alloys of similar composition.
It also has been found to be valuable in welding dissimilar metals such as carbon steel to stainless steel,
B particularly those grades high in nickel. L
R AFM ER312 gives a two-phase weld deposit with substantial percentages of ferrite in an austenite matrix. •
Z Even with considerable dilution by austenite-forming elements such as nickel, the microstructure remains A
two-phase and thus highly resistant to weld metal cracks and fissures.

T C Cr Ni Mo Mn H
I 0.15 28.00 ~ 32.00 8.00 ~ 10.50 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 •
T Si P S N Cu F
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75

S
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER316 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER316 is used for welding Type 316 and similar alloys.
It has been used successfully in certain applications involving special base metals for high-temperature service.
A The presence of molybdenum provides creep resistance at elevated temperatures and pitting resistance in
S
E a halide atmosphere.
•
R
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.08 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
Si P S N Cu S
A
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 •
I
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
129
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER316H C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER316H is the same as AFM ER316, except that the allowable carbon content has been restricted to
the higher portion of the 316 range.
B Carbon content in the range of 0.04 to 0.08 wt.% provides higher strength at elevated temperatures. L
R It is used to weld 316H base metal. •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.04 ~ 0.08 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
T H
Si P S N Cu
I •
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
T F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER316L N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This classification is the same as AFM ER316, except for the carbon content. Low carbon (0.03 percent max.)
in AFM ER316L reduces the possibility of intergranular chromium carbide precipitation and thereby increases
A the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium (niobium) or
S
E titanium.
It is primarily used for welding lowcarbon molybdenum-bearing austenitic alloys. •
R
AFM ER316L, however, is not as strong at elevated temperature as the columbium (niobium)-stabilized alloys E
O
or Type ER316H.
M Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):
S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.03 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
W
N Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
I All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
130
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER316LSi C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
This classification is the same as AFM ER316L, except for the higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the fill metal in the gas metal arc welding process.
B If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity is L
R somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal. •
Z A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.04 ~ 0.08 18.00 ~ 20.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 ~ 2.50 H
I Si P S N Cu •
T 0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER317L N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER317L is used to weld 316 and 317 base metals. Low carbon (0.03 percent max.) in AFM ER317L
reduces the possibility of intergranular carbide precipitation.
A This increases the resistance to intergranular corrosion without the use of stabilizers such as columbium
S
E (niobium) or titanium.
AFM ER317L, however, may not be as strong at elevated temperature as the columbium (niobium)-stabilized •
R
alloys or Type 317. E
O

S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.03 18.50 ~ 20.50 13.00 ~ 15.00 3.00 ~ 4.00 1.00 ~ 2.50
W
N Si P S N Cu
0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
131
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER330 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER330 is commonly used where heat and scale resisting properties above 1800°F (980°C) are required,
except in high-sulphur environments, as these environments may adversely affect elevated temperature
B performance. L
R Repairs of defects in alloy castings and the welding of castings and wrought alloys of similar composition are •
Z the most common applications. A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.18 ~ 0.25 15.00 ~ 17.00 34.00 ~ 37.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 H
I Si P S N Cu •
T 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER347 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
With the addition of Cb (Nb), the possibility of intergranular chromium carbide precipitation is reduced and
thus susceptibility to intergranular corrosion.
A AFM ER347 is usually used for welding alloys 321 and 347.
S
E Although Cb (Nb) is the stabilizing element usually specified in ER347, it should be recognized that tantalum
(Ta) is also present. •
R
Ta and Cb (Nb) are almost equally effective in stabilizing carbon and in providing high-temperature strength. E
O
If dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld metal, the crack sensitivity of
the weld may increase substantially.
M
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): S
A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn •
I
0.08 19.00 ~ 21.50 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50 W
N
Si P S Cu Nb + Ta
I 0.30 ~ 0.65 0.03 0.03 0.75 10 x C Min. / 1.00 Max.
F
N All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S
C
F M D
W
O S
132
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER347Si C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER347Si is the same as AFM ER347, except for the higher silicon content.
This improves the usability of the filler metal in the gas metal arc welding process.
B If the dilution by the base metal produces a low ferrite or fully austenitic weld, the crack sensitivity of L
R the weld is somewhat higher than that of a lower silicon content weld metal. •
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.08 19.00 ~ 21.50 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.75 1.00 ~ 2.50
T H
Si P S Cu Nb + Ta
I •
0.65 ~ 1.00 0.03 0.03 0.75 10 x C Min. / 1.00 Max.
T F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER320 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER320 is primarily used to weld base metals of similar composition, such as alloy 20, for applications
where resistance to severe corrosion is required for a wide range of chemicals including sulfuric and sulfurous
A acids and their salts.
S
E They can be used to weld both castings and wrought alloys of similar composition without postweld heat
treatment. •
R
E
O Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.07 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 2.50 S
A Si P S Cu Nb + Ta •
I 0.60 0.03 0.03 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. / 1.00 Max. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
133
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER320LR C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: S
AFM ER320LR weld metal deposits have the same basic composition as that deposited by AFM ER320;
however, the elements of C, Si, P, and S are specified at lower maximum levels, and Cb (Nb) and Mn are
B controlled within narrower ranges. L
R These changes reduce the weld metal fissuring (while maintaining the corrosion resistance) frequently •
Z encountered in fully austenitic stainless steel weld metals. A
Consequently, welding practices typically used for austenitic stainless steel weld metals containing ferrite can
be used in bare filler metal welding processes such as gas tungsten arc and gas metal arc.
AFM ER320LR has been used successfully in submerged arc overlay welding, but it may be prone to cracking
T when used for joining base metal by the submerged arc process. H
I AFM ER320LR has a lower minimum tensile strength than AFM ER320. •
T Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%): F
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
0.025 19.00 ~ 21.00 32.00 ~ 36.00 2.00 ~ 3.00 1.50 ~ 2.00
M Si P S Cu Nb + Ta S C
A 0.15 0.015 0.02 3.00 ~ 4.00 8 x C Min. / 1.00 Max.
M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER385 (904L) N

S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER385 is used primarily for welding of ASTM B625, B673, B674, and B677 (UNSN08904) materials for
the handling of sulfuric acid and many chloride containing media.
A It may also be used to join Type 317L material where improved corrosion resistance in specific media is
S
E needed.
AFM ER385 may be used for joining UNS N08904 base metals to other grades of stainless steel. •
R
The elements C, S, P, and Si are specified at lower maximum levels to minimize weld metal hot cracking, and E
O
fissuring (while maintaining corrosion resistance) frequently encountered in fully austenitic weld metals.
S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.025 19.50 ~ 21.50 24.00 ~ 26.00 4.20 ~ 5.20 1.00 ~ 2.50
W
N Si P S N Cu
0.50 0.02 0.03 - 1.20 ~ 2.00
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
134
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER409Nb C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER409Nb is the same as ER409 except that niobium (columbium)is used instead of titanium to achieve
similar results.
B Oxidation losses across the arc are generally lower. L
R It is used to weld 409 stainless steel. •
Z The greatest usage is for applications where thin stock is fabricated into exhaust system components. A
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
T 0.08 10.50 ~ 13.50 0.60 0.50 0.80 H
I Si P S Cu Nb + Ta •
T 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 10 x C Min. / 1.00 Max. F
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER410 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
This 12 Cr alloy (wt.%) is an air-hardening steel.
Preheat and postheat treatments are required to achieve welds of adequate ductility for many engineering
A purposes.
S
E AFM ER410 is used to welding 403, 405, 410, and 416 stainless.
It is also used for deposition of overlays on carbon steels to resist corrosion, erosion, or abrasion. •
R
E
O Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.12 11.50 ~ 13.50 0.60 0.75 0.60 S
A Si P S N Cu
•
I 0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
135
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER410NiMo C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER410NiMo is primarily designed for welding ASTM CA6NM castings or similar material, as well as
light gage 410, 410S, and 405 base metals.
B AFM ER410NiMo is modified to contain less chromium and more nickel to eliminate ferrite L
R in the microstructure as it has a deleterious effect on mechanical properties. •
Z Final postweld heat treatment should not exceed 1150°F (620°C), as higher temperatures may result in A
rehardening due to untempered martensite in the microstructure after cooling to room temperature.
T C Cr Ni Mo Mn H
I 0.06 11.00 ~ 12.50 4.00 ~ 5.00 0.40 ~ 0.70 0.60 •
T Si P S N Cu F
0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M S C
A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER420 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER420 is similar to AFM ER410, except for slightly higher chromium and carbon contents.
AFM ER420 is used for many surfacing operations requiring corrosion resistance provided by 12 percent
A chromium along with somewhat higher hardness than weld metal deposited by AFM ER410. S
E This increases wear resistance. •
R
O
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
M 0.25 ~ 0.40 12.00 ~ 14.00 0.60 0.75 0.60
S
A Si P S N Cu
•
I 0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
W
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
136
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER430 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
This is a 16 Cr (wt.%) alloy. The composition is balanced by providing sufficient chromium to give adequate
corrosion resistance for the usual applications, and yet retain sufficient ductility in the heat-treated condition.
B (Excessive chromium will result in lower ductility.) L
R Welding with AFM ER430 usually requires preheating and postweld heat treatment. •
Z Optimum mechanical properties and corrosion resistance are obtained only when the weldment is heat treated A
following the welding operation.

T H
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
I •
0.10 15.50 ~ 17.00 0.60 0.75 0.60
T F
Si P S N Cu
0.50 0.03 0.03 - 0.75
M All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S C

A M D •
S
G I
T AFM ER630 N
S AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T Description: K
AFM ER630 is designed primarily for welding ASTM A564 Type 630 (alloy 17-4PH) and some other
precipitation-hardening stainless steels.
A The composition is modified to prevent the formation of ferrite networks in the martensitic microstructure S
E which have a deleterious effect on mechanical properties. •
R Dependent on the application and weld size, the weld metal may be used either as-welded, welded
E
O and precipitation hardened, or welded, solution treated, and precipitation hardened.

S
A C Cr Ni Mo Mn
•
I 0.05 16.00 ~ 16.75 4.50 ~ 5.00 0.75 0.25 ~ 0.75
W
N Si P S Cu Nb + Ta
0.75 0.03 0.03 0.75 0.15 ~ 0.30
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
137
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER2209 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
AFM ER2209 is used primarily to weld duplex stainless steels which contain approximately 22 percent of
chromium such as UNS S31803 (alloy 2205).
B Deposits have “duplex” microstructures consisting of an austenite-ferrite matrix. L
R AFM ER2209 is characterized by high tensile strength, resistance to stress corrosion cracking, and improved •
Z resistance to pitting. A

T H
C Cr Ni Mo Mn
I •
0.03 21.50 ~ 23.50 7.50 ~ 9.50 2.50 ~ 3.50 0.50 ~ 2.00
T F
Si P S N Cu
0.90 0.03 0.03 0.08 ~ 0.20 0.75

A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
138
A T
L O
M B
C AFM ER2594 C
B AWS/SFA A5.9 •
T S
Description:
Superduplex grade 2594 electrodes provide matching chemistry and mechanical property characteristics
to wrought superduplex alloys such as 2507 and Zeron 100 as well as superduplex casting alloys (ASTM A890).
B The welding wire is overalloyed 2 - 3 percent in Nickel to provide the optimum ferrite/austenite ratio in L
R the finished weld. This structure results in high tensile/yield strength and superior resistance to SCC •
Z and pitting corrosion. A
Typical Chemical Composition (%):

T C Mn Si Fe Cr Ni H
I 0.02 1.00 1.00 Bal. 25.50 9.25 •
T Cu Mo / W S/P N PREN F
0.50 3.9 / 0.04 0.01 / 0.025 0.250 40 Min.
M C
A Typical Mechanical Properties of Weld Metal: •
G psi 123,000 I
Tensile Strength
MPa 850
psi 94,000
T Yield Strength N
MPa 650
S Elongation 4 D (%) 28 •
T Impact @ 20 o C > 27 J K
Hardness HRC* 23 ~ 28
A * Meets NACE MRO175
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
139
A T
L O
M B
Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wire
C
B
AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG C
•
T Applications: S
AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is used for butt welds in piping systems.
GTAW process has been recommended in welding of the first layer (root pass).
B Conventional GTAW requires the use of Argon Gas for the back-bead shielding to prevent oxidation. L
R AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG can be used in place of the conventional GTAW process without •
the use of argon gas.
Z One of the advantages in using AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is the ability to cut costs by not having
A
to use Argon Gas.
T Characteristics: H
I When AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is melted and slag is produced, satisfactory back-beads are •
T obtained while the slag protects the bead from being oxidized by the atmosphere. F
The slag can then be easily removed as it would in the SMAW process.
M Typical Chemical Composition (%): C

A Product C Si Mn P S Ni Cr Mo •
G AFM 308LFC 0.018 0.35 1.71 0.022 0.007 10.12 20.9 - I
AFM 309LFC 0.025 0.37 1.76 0.021 0.006 13.14 23.6 -
AFM 316LFC 0.020 0.37 1.73 0.021 0.007 12.31 19.3 2.10
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
140
A T
L O
M B
Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wire
C C
B Subject: •
Using Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wire for GTAW welding in accordance with
T the ASME Boiler & Pressure Vessel Code.
S
B AFM Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG is not included in the AWS and ASME specilications, however, it can L
R be qualified for Code use. •
Z ASME B & PV Code, Section IX, Welding & Brazing Qualilications, permits the usc of any filler metal as long A
as it is defined by the Code or in the welding procedure specification (WPS).
The user may specify the filler metal by a chemical composition range.
This range tnay be determined by any of the following:
T H
I • from the chemical analysis of the weld deposit taken from the procedure qualification test coupon or, •
T • from the chemical composition as reported by the manufacturer’s or supplier’s certificate of compliance. F
In lieu of an A-number designation, the nominal chetmical composition of the weld deposit shall be indicated
on the WPS and on the procedure qualification record.
M C
Designation on nominal chemical composition may also be accomplished by using the manufacturer’s trade
A designation. •
G This procedure is discussed in ASME Sect ion IX, QW-404.5. I
By satisfying the above mentioned criteria one may use flux coated GTAW filler metal for boilers
T (ASME Section 1), pressure vessels (ASME Section VIII), piping (ANSI/ASME B31.1 ), or a variety of N
weldments fabricated to numerous other national standards.
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
141
A T
L O
M B
Welding Tips for Stainless Steel
C Welding Tips for Stainless Steel C
B •
T I. (GTAW - Gas Tungsten Arc Welding) S
When using stainless steels with the gas tungsten arc process, direct current electrode negative
(dcen) is preferred.
For base metal up to 1/16 in. (1.6mm) thick, argon is the preferred shielding gas because there is
B less tendency to melt through these lighter thicknesses. L
R For greater thickness, or for automatic welding, mixtures of helium and argon are recommended •
Z because of the greater penetration and better surface appearance. A
Argon gas for shielding may also be used and will give satisfactory results in most cases, but a somewhat higher
amperage will be required.
T II. (GMAW - Gas Metal Arc Welding) H

I When using the gas metal arc welding process in which the filler metal is employed as an electrode, direct current •
electrode positive (dcep) is most commonly used.
T The shielding gas for spray transfer is usually argon, with or without minor additions of oxygen. F
For short circuiting transfer, shielding gases composed of helium plus additions of oxygen and carbon dioxide
often are used.
M The minimum thickness that can be welded is approximately 1/8 to 3/16 in. (3.2 to 4.8mm). C
However, thinner sections can be joined if a backing is used.
A The higher silicon levels improve the washing and wetting behavior of the weld metal. •
G For instance, for increases from 0.30 to 0.65 percent silicon, the improvement is pronounced; for increases from 0.65 I
to 1.0 % silicon, further improvement is experienced but is less pronounced.
III. (SAW - Submerged Arc Welding)

T For submerged arc welding, direct current electrode positive (dcep) or alternating current (ac) may be used. N
S Basic or neutral fluxes are generally recommended in order to minimize silicon pickup and the oxidation of chromium •
T and other elements. K
When welding with fluxes that are not basic or neutral, electrodes having a silicon content below the normal 0.30%
minimum may be desired for submerged arc welding.
A Such active fluxes may contribute some silicon to the weld metal.
In this case, the higher silicon does not significantly improve the washing and wetting action of the weld metal.ww S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
142
A T
L O
M B
Flux Coated Stainless Steel Wire
C Welding Tips for Flux Coated Stainless Steel TIG Wires C

B •
T If the pieces to be welded with AFM flux coated tig wire are thicker than 12 Ga, they must be beveled. S
The amperage to be used will depend on the thickness of the weldment and diameter of the tungsten.
The gap between the two pieces to be joined must be at least as wide as the diameter of the flux coated tig wire being
B used. L
R The base materials that are being joined must also be tacked at enough places, so that the gap remains open. •
Z If the gap “sucks” closed you will not succeed with AFM Flux Coated TIG Wire. A
The gap is very important in this process.
When the process is started always begin on a tack.

T In using AFM Flux Coated TIG Wire, you will see an orange puddle. and not the clear puddle as you would with bare H
I stainless tig wire. •
We recommend you use a keyhole technique with AFM Flux Coated TIG Wire.
T Do not dip the rod too fast, and you must usc the keyhole or you will not get the coverage on the backside. F
If you dip too fast, the filler metal will lay and freeze on the top only.
The keyhole is also very important in this process.
M Welding in all positions is possible with this wire. To weld out of ’ position with this wire, you will need to vary your C
amperage.
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
143
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B For Carbon Steel •
AFM E70C-6M AWS/SFA A5.18 E70C-6M 152
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-1 153
B AFM E71T-1 (Baked) AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-1 154 L
R AFM E71T-11 AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-11 155 •
Click to Download
Z AFM E71TGS AWS/SFA A5.20 E71T-GS 156 A
T H
For Heat-Resisting Steel
I •
T F
AFM E81T1-B2 AWS/SFA A5.29 E81T1-B2C 157
AFM E91T1-B3 AWS/SFA A5.29 E91T1-B2C 158
M C
A •
G For Low Alloy Steel I
AFM E81T1-Ni1 AWS/SFA A5.29 E81T1-Ni1M 159
T AFM E81T1-Ni2 AWS/SFA A5.29 E81T1-Ni2C / E81T1-Ni2M 160 N
S •
T K
For Stainless Steel
A AFM Product AWS Classification Page
S
E AFM 308HT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E308HT1-1/-4 161
•
R AFM 308LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E308LT1-1/-4 162
E
O AFM 309LMoT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E309LMoT1-1/-4 163
AFM 309LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E309LT1-1/-4 164
M AFM 316LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E316LT1-1/-4 165 S
A AFM 317LT1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E317LT1-1/-4 166 •
I Click to Download
AFM 347T1-1 AWS/SFA A5.22 E347T1-1 167 W
N
Stainless Steel Flux Cored Wires 168 ~ 169
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
144
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.18 •
T Designates use as either an electrode or rod (ER), S
or use only as an electrode (E).
Indicates in 1000 psi increments, the minimum tensile strength

B of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested L
R according to the A5.18 specification. •
- In this case, 70 indicates 70 000 psi.
Z A
Indicates whether the filler metal is solid (S) or composite (C).
T Indicates the chemical composition of a solid electrode or H

the chemical composition of the weld metal produced by
I a composite electrode.
•
T The use of the “GS” suffix designates filler metals intended for F
single pass applications only.
M Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. C

A •
G ER 70 S - X N HZ I
E 70 C - X Y N HZ
T ER 48 S - X N HZ The letter “N” as a suffix to a classification indicates that N
S E 48 C - X Y N HZ the weld metal is intended for the core belt region of nuclear
reactor vessels, as described in the Annex to the specification.
•
T This suffix changes the limits on the phosphorus and copper K
as follows:
P = 0.012% maximum / Cu = 0.08% maximum
A
S
E
•
R
E
O Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification of
composite electrodes.
Carbon dioxide (AWS A5.32 Class SG-C) is indicated by “C”
M and 75–80% Argon/balance CO2
(AWS A5.32 Class SG-AC-Y, where Y is 20 to 25) is indicated S
A by “M.” •
I
W
N Indicates in 10 MPa increments, the minimum tensile strength
of the weld metal produced by the electrode when tested
according to the A5.18M specification.
I - In this case, 48 indicates 480 MPa. F
N
C
F
W
O
145
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.20 •
T Designates an electrode. S
Tensile strength designator.
For A5.20 this designator indicates the minimum tensile strength
(when multiplied by 10,000 psi) of the weld metal when the weld is
B made in the manner prescribed by this specification. L
For A5.20M two digits are used to indicate the minimum tensile
R strength (when multiplied by 10 MPa). •
Z Position designator. This designator is either “0” or “1.” A
“0” is for flat and horizontal positions only.
“1” is for all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical with downward
progression and/or vertical with upward progression and overhead).
T This designator identifies the electrode as a flux cored electrode. H
I Usability designator. •
T This designator is some number from 1 through 14 or the letter “G” F
(or “GS”).
This designator refers to the usability of the electrode with
requirements for polarity and general operating characteristics.
The letter “G” indicates that the polarity and general operating
M characteristics are not specified. C
A An “S” is used after the “G” to indicate that the electrode is suitable
only for single pass welding.
•
G Shielding gas designator.2 I
Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification.
The letter “C” indicates that the electrode is classified using 100% CO2
shielding gas.
T The letter “M” indicates that the electrode is classified using 75–80% N
Argon/balance CO2 shielding gas.
S When no designator appears in this position, it indicates that •
T the electrode being classified is self-shielded and that no external K
shielding gas was used.
EXXT - XX-JXHX Optional Supplemental Designators3 (J, X, HX)

A Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. S
E The letter “D” or “Q” when present in this position indicates that •
R the weld metal will meet supplemental mechanical property
requirements with welding done using low heat input, fast cooling rate E
O procedures and using high heat input, slow cooling rate procedures as
prescribed on page 128.
M The letter “J” when present in this position designates that
the electrode meets the requirements for improved toughness and will S
A deposit weld metal with Charpy V-Notch properties of at least 20 ft∙lbf
•
I at –40°F [27J at –40°C] when the welds are made in a manner
prescribed by this specification. W
N Notes:
1. The combination of these designators constitutes the flux cored electrode classification.
2. See AWS A5.32/A5.32M.
I 3. These designators are optional and do not constitute a part of the flux cored electrode classification.
F
N
C
F
W
O
146
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B AWS/SFA A5.22 •
T S
Indicates a welding electrode.
Designates a composition of the weld metal.

B L
R Designates a flux cored welding electrode.
•
Z Designates recommended position of welding: A
0 = flat and horizontal; 1 = all position
Designates the external shielding gas to be employed during

T welding specified for classification. H
I The letter “J” when present in this position designates that
•
T the electrode meets the requirement of toughness and will deposit F
weld metal with Charpy V-Notch properties of at least 0.015 in
[0.38 mm] lateral expansion at -320 ºF [-196 ºC]
E XXX TX - X J
M C
A •
G I
R XXX T1 - 5
Designates the external shielding gas to be employed during welding.
T Type of shielding gas is 1005 Argon SG-A. N
S •
Designates recommended position of welding: 1 = all position.
T K
Designates a flux cored welding rod.
A
Designates composition of the weld metal. S
E
•
R Indicates a welding rod.
E
O
M
S
A This symbol indicates metal cored electrode.
•
I
N EC XXX W
This symbol indicates the alloy content of the deposited weld metal.
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
147
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires

B AWS/SFA A5.29 •
T Designates an electrode. S
Tensile strength designator.
For A5.29 this designator indicates the minimum tensile strength
(when multiplied by 10 ksi) of the weld metal when the weld is made
in the manner prescribed by this specification.
B Two digits arc used for weld metal of 100 ksi minimum tensile strength
L
R and higher. •
For A5.29M two digits are used to indicate the minimum tensile
Z strength (when multiplied by 10 MPa). A
Positionality designator.
This designator is either “0” or “1.”
“0” is for flat and horizontal positions only.
T “1” is for all positions (flat, horizontal, vertical with downward H
I progression and/or vertical with upward progression and overhead).
•
This designator identifies the electrode as a flux cored electrode.
T F
Usability designator.
This designator is the number 1, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or the letter “G”.
The number refers to the usability of the electrode.
The letter ‘’G” indicates that the polarity and general operating
M characteristics arc not specified. C
A Deposit composition designator. •
Two, three or four digits are used to designate the chemical
G composition of the deposited weld metal). I
The letter “G” indicates that the chemical composition is not specified.
Shielding gas designatorb.
Indicates the type of shielding gas used for classification.
T The letter “C” indicates a shielding gas of I 00% CO2. N
S The letter “M” indicates a shielding gas of 75-80% Argon/balance CO2.
When no designator appears in this position, it indicates that
•
T the electrode being classified is self-shielded and that no external K
shielding gas was used.
EXXTX - XX-JHX Optional Supplemental Designatorsc (J, HX)

A
Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator S
E
The letter “J” when present in this position designates that •
R the electrode meets the requirements for improved toughness and will E
O deposit weld metal with Charpy V-Notch properties of at least
20 ft·lbf [27J] at a test temperature of 20°F [10°C] lower than
the temperature shown for that classification in Table I U [Table I M].
M Notes:
S
A a. The combination of these designators constitutes the flux cored electrode classification.
Note that specific chemical compositions are not always identified with specific mechanical properties in the specification.
•
I A supplier is required by the specification to include the mechanical properties appropriate for a particular electrode in the classification of the electrode.
Thus. for example, a complete designation is E80T5-Ni3. EXXT5-Ni3 is not a complete classification. W
N b. See AWS A5.32/A5.32M, Specification for Welding Shielding Gases.
c. These designators arc optional and do not constitute a part of the flux cored electrode classification.
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
148
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 •
T S
Diffusible Hydrogen Limits for Weld Metala
Optional Supplemental Average Diffusible Hydrogen,

B Diffusible Hydrogen Maximume, f mL/100g L
Designatorb, c, d Deposited Metal
R •
Z A
H16 16.0
H8 8.0
T H
I •
H4 4.0
T F
Notes:
a. Limits on diffusible hydrogen when tested in accordance with AWS A4.3.
M b. See page 127. C
A c. The lower diffusible hydrogen levels (H8 and H4) may not be available in some classifications. •
d. Electrodes which satisfy the diffusible hydrogen limit for the H4 designator also satisfy the limits for
G I
the H8 and H16 designators.
Electrodes which satisfy the diffusible hydrogen limit for the H8 category also satisfy the limits for
the H16 designator.
T e. These hydrogen limits are based on welding in air containing a maximum of 10 grains of water per pound N
S 1.43 g/kg] of dry air. •
T Testing at any higher atmospheric moisture level is acceptable provided these limits are satisfied. K
f. The maximum average diffusible hydrogen requirement for electrodes identified with the “Q” optional,
supplemental designator shall be either 5.0 mL/100 g deposited metal or 8.0 mL/100 g deposited metal
A when testing according to the provisions of this specification.
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
149
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 C
B •
Procedure Requirements for “D” and “Q” Optional Supplemental Designators
T S
Optional Procedure Heat Input Preheat Interpass Heat Input Required Average
Supplemental (Fast or Slow Temperature Temperature Requirement for Heat Input for
Designator Cooling Rate) °F [°C] °F [°C] Any Single Passa All Passesa
B L
R For electrode diameters < 3/32 in [2.4 mm] •
Z 33 kJ/in A
low 30 +2, –5 kJ/in
[1.3 kJ/mm]
(fast cooling rate) 70° ± 25°F 200° ± 25°F [1.2 +0.1, –0.2 kJ/mm]
maximum
[20° ± 15°C] [90° ± 15°C]
T For electrode diameters ≥ 3/32 in [2.4 mm] H
I D
44 kJ/in 40 +2, –5 kJ/in •
T [1.7 kJ/mm] maximum [1.6 +0.1, –0.2 kJ/mm] F
high 300° ± 25°F 500° ± 50°F 75 kJ/in 80 +5, –2 kJ/in
(slow cooling rate) [150° ± 15°C] [260° ± 25°C] [3.0 kJ/mm] minimum [3.1 +0.2, –0.1 kJ/mm]
M low 70° ± 25°F 150°F max. 33 kJ/in 30 +2, –5 kJ/in C
A (fast cooling rate) [20° ± 15°C] [65°C max.] [1.3 kJ/mm] maximum [1.2 +0.1, –0.2 kJ/mm] •
Q
G high 300° ± 25°F 300° ± 25°F 60 kJ/in 70 +5, –2 kJ/in I
(slow cooling rate) [150° ± 15°C] [150° ± 15°C] [2.4 kJ/mm] minimum [2.8 +0.2, –0.1 kJ/mm]
Note:
T a. Does not apply to first layer. The first layer may have one or two passes. N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
150
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C AWS A5.20/A5.20M:2005 C
B Mechanical Property Requirements for “D” and “Q” Optional Supplemental Designators •
T S
Optional Supplemental Designator Tensile Test Requirements Minimum Charpy V-Notch Requirements
58 ksi [400 MPa] min. yield strength

40 ft∙lbf at +70ºF [54J at +20ºC]
B D 70 ksi [490 MPa] min. tensile strength
(see Notes a, b)
L
R 22% min. % elongation in 2 in [50 mm] •
Z 58 to 80 ksi [400–550 MPa] yield strength A
for high heat input, slow cooling rate test
90 ksi [620 MPa] max. yield strength 20 ft∙lbf at –20°F [27J at –30°C]
Q for low heat input, fast cooling rate test (see Note d)
T H
I 22% min. % elongation in 2 in [50 mm] •
(see Note c)
T F
Notes:
a. Five specimens are to be tested. The lowest and highest values obtained from each of five specimens from a single test plate shall
be disregarded.
M Two of the remaining three values shall equal, or exceed, the specified toughness of 40 ft∙lbf [54J] energy level at the testing C
temperature.
A One of the three may be lower, but not lower than 30 ft∙lbf [41J], and the average of the three shall not be less than the required
•
G 40 ft∙lbf [54J] energy level. I
b. The electrode shall also meet a minimum toughness requirement of 20 ft∙lbf at 0°F [27J at –18°C] when tested according to
the standard A5.20[A5.20M] classification test requirements.
c. Tensile specimens shall not be aged when testing for the “Q” designator.
T d. Five specimens shall be tested. One of the five specimens may be lower than the specified 20 ft∙lbf [27 J] energy level, but not N
S lower than 15 ft∙lbf [20 J], and the average of the five shall not be less than the required minimum 20 ft∙lbf [27 J] energy level. •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
151
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E70C-6M C
•
AWS/SFA A5.18
T S
AFM E70C-6M is designed for welding of 490MPa high tensile steel with only Ar + CO2 mixtures.
It is especially suitable for fillet welding and has a high tolerance to primer.
It is a metal type of flux cored wire for flat and horizontal position welding and provides excellent CVN
B toughness at low temperatures. L
R It features good penetration, high resisitance to porosity, good wetting behaviour as well as low hydrogen •
Z contents. A
AFM E70C-6M is intended for semi-automatic, automatic, singleand multiple pass welding.
The shielding gas should be used Ar + 20 ~ 25% CO2 for welding.
T H
I Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%): •
T 75% ~ 85% Ar C Mn Si S P F
+ 0.12 1.75 0.90 0.03 0.03
Shielding Gas Balance CO2 Ni* Cr** Mo** V* Cu
or
M 100 % CO2 0.50 0.20 0.30 0.08 0.50 C
A •
* Use of a shielding gas other than that specified will result in different weld metal composition.
G I
** The sum of Ni, Cr, Mo & V shall not exceed 0.50%
T Typical mechanical properties of all-weld-metal: N

psi 70,000
S Tensile Strength •
MPa 480
T K
psi 58,000
Yield Strength
MPa 400
A Elongation in 2” (%) 22 S
E
•
R
O
0.045” 1.2 mm
M 0.052” 1.4 mm 25 Lb & 44 Lb Spools
1/16’ 1.6 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
152
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) is designed for welding of 490 MPa high tensile strength steel with outstanding
mechanical properties.
The wire is a titania type of flux cored wire for all-position welding.
B It provides low fume generation and has good impact strength at low temperatures. L
R AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked Wire) has excellent usability with stable arc, less spatter levels, better bead appearance •
Z as like a solid wire. A
The shielding gas is 100% CO2.
T Applications: H
AFM E71T-1 (Unbaked) is commonly used for machineries, shipbuilding, offshore structures,
I bridges & general fabrications.
•
T F
Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%):
Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P
M C
CO2 100% 0.03 1.35 0.38 0.010 0.015
A •
G I
Typical mechanical properties of all-weld-metal:
psi 75,000
T Tensile Strength N
MPa 520
S •
psi 82,000
T Yield Strength K
MPa 570
A Charphy V-Notch @ 0oF 20ft. Lbs
S
E
•
R
O
0.045” 1.2 mm
25 Lb & 44 Lb Spools
M 0.052” 1.4 mm
60Lb Coils S
A 1/16’ 1.6 mm •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
153
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71T-1 (Baked) C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71T-1 (Baked) is designed for welding of 490 MPa high tensile strength steel with slow freezing
slag system.
The wire is a titania type of flux cored wire for all-position welding.
B It produces excellent mechanical properties, easy slag removal, low spatter loss smooth bead surface, L
R high X-ray safety. •
Z AFM E71T-1 (Baked) is a very efficient method of the welding due to the higher deposition rate. A
It can be used with 100% CO2 or 75% Ar + 25% CO2
T Applications: H
AFM E71T-1 (Baked) is commonly used for machineries, shipbuilding, offshore structures, bridges &
I general fabrications.
•
T F
Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%):

M Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P C
A CO2 100% 0.04 1.30 0.45 0.012 0.015 •
G I
psi 75,000
T Tensile Strength
MPa 520
N
S psi 84,000
•
T Yield Strength
MPa 580
K
A Charphy V-Notch @ 0oF 20ft. Lbs
S
E
•
R
O
0.045” 1.2 mm
25 Lb & 44 Lb Spools
0.052” 1.4 mm
M 60Lb Coils
1/16’ 1.6 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
154
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71T-11 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71T-11 is a self-shielded flux cored wire for lap and fillet welds of mild and medium tensile steels not
exceeding 510 MPa.
It is suitable for a variety of applications such as prefab. building fabrication, tanks, ornamental iron,
B farm implement, repairs and general fabrication. L
R •
Z Characteristics on Usage: A
• Wire is for all-positional welding of single and multiple pass fabrications.
• The arc characteristics are so smooth and stable, even the most novice welder can produce good welds.
T • It is designed for on site general fabrication and structural work requiring no impact properties. H
I • It can be used DCEN polarity. •
T F
Base Materials:
ASTM A36 Gr. all; A 123; A 179; A 181 Gr. 60, 70; A266 Gr. 1; A283 Gr. A. B, C. D; A284
Gr. C. D: A285 Gr. A, B, C; A500 Gr. all; A501 Gr. all; A556 Gr. A2; A557 Gr. B2. C2:
M A562; A619-622; A 709 Gr. 36. 50. C
A •
G Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%): I
Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P Al
None 010 0.55 0.10 0.006 0.016 1.20
T Typical mechanical properties of all-weld-metal: N
S psi 72,500
•
T Tensile Strength
MPa 500
K
psi 76,800
Yield Strength
A MPa 530
S
E Elongation in 2” (%) 23
•
R
Size available & Recommended currents - DC Wire (-): E
O
Diameter 0.045” 1/16” 5/64”
(mm) (1.2 mm) (1.6 mm) (2.0 mm)
M
Amp. F 80 ~ 200 160 ~ 270 180 ~ 280 S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
155
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E71TGS C
•
AWS/SFA A5.20
T S
AFM E71TGS is a self-shielded flux-cored wire for general purpose use and welding in all positions.
It is especially suited for single-pass fillet and lap welds on thin-gauge mild or galvanized steel.
B L
R Applications: •
Z AFM E71TGS is used for prefab, building fabrication, tanks, ornamental iron, farm implement, repairs A
and general fabrication.
T Characteristics on Usage: H
• Wire is for all-positional welding of single pass automatic and semiautomatic fabrications.
I • It can be applicable for aluminized steel and galvanized steel from 0.045” (1.2 mm) to 3/16” (4.8 mm). •
T • It is designed for on site general fabrication and structural work requiring no impact properties. F
• It can be used DCEN polarity.
M Typical chemical composition of all-weld-metal (%): C

A Shielding Gas C Mn Si S P Al •
G None 016 0.82 0.31 0.006 0.014 1.30 I

T psi 75,400 N
S Tensile Strength •
MPa 520
T Longitudinal Guided Bend Test No Defects K
A Size available & Recommended currents - DC Wire (+), (-):

S
E Diameter 0.045” 1/16” 5/64”
(mm) (1.2 mm) (1.6 mm) (2.0 mm) •
R
Amp. F 80 ~ 200 160 ~ 270 180 ~ 280 E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
156
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E81T1-B2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E81T1-B2 is an all-position flux cored wire that contains 1-1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo.
The weld metal analysis is very similar to AFM E8018-B2 low hydrogen electrode.
It is used for welding 1/2% Cr-1/2% Mo, 1% Cr-1/2% Mo, and 1-1/4% Cr-1/2% Mo steels,
B such as ASTM A335-P11 pipe and ASTM A387 Gr.11 plate. L
R The wire can be used in either single or multiple pass welding. •
Z AFM E81T1-B2 should be used with 100% CO2 shielding gas. A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal:

T C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo H
I 0.05 ~ 0.12 1.25 0.030 0.030 0.80 - 1.00-1.50 0.40 ~ 0.65 •
T All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. F
M Tension Test Requirements: C

A psi 80,000 ~ 100,000 •
Tensile Strength
G MPa 550 ~ 690 I
psi 68,000
Yield Strength @ 0.2% Offset, Min.
MPa 470
T Elongation in 2” (%) 19 Min. N
S •
T K
Standard Packaging:
0.045” 1.2 mm
A 33 Lb Spools
1/16’ 1.6 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
157
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E91T1-B3 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E91T1-B3 is an all-position flux cored wire that contains 2-1/4% Cr-1% Mo.
The weld metal analysis is similar to AFM E9018-B3 low hydrogen electrode.
It is recommended for welding 2-1/4% Cr-1% Mo steels, such as ASTM A335-P22 pipe and ASTM A387 r.22
B plate, and can be used for single or multiple pass welding. L
R AFM E91T1-B3 should be used with 100% CO2 shielding gas. •
Z A
C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo
T H
0.05 ~ 0.12 1.25 0.030 0.030 0.80 - 2.00-2.50 0.90 ~ 1.20
I •
M Tension Test Requirements: C

psi 90,000 ~ 110,000
MPa 620 ~ 760
G I
psi 78,000
MPa 540
T Elongation in 2” (%) 17 Min. N
S •
T K
Standard Packaging:
0.045” 1.2 mm
33 Lb Spools
A 1/16’ 1.6 mm
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
158
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E81T1-Ni1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E81T1-Ni1 is an all-position wire which has a smooth, easily controlled arc that produces a spray-like
transfer.
The easily removable slag firmly holds the molten puddle for out-of-position work.
B It exhibits excellent low temperature impact toughness as welded and stress relieved. L
R AFM E81T1-Ni1 is commonly used on petrochemical equipment, offshore oil construction, ship fabrication, •
Z and heavy machinery. A
The weld metal analysis is similar to AFM E8018-C3 low hydrogen electrode and is used with
a 75% Ar +25% CO2 shielding gas.
T H
I Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal: •
T C Mn P S Si Ni Cr Mo V F
0.12 1.50 0.030 0.030 0.80 0.80 ~ 1.10 0.15 0.35 0.05

M C
A •
G Tension Test Requirements: I
psi 80,000 ~ 110,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 550 ~ 690
T N
psi 68,000
S Yield Strength @ 0.2% Offset, Min. •
MPa 470
T K
Elongation in 2” (%) 19 Min.
A
S
R 0.045” 1.2 mm
33 Lb Spools E
O 1/16’ 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
159
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E81T1-Ni2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.29
T S
AFM E81T1-Ni2 is an all-position flux cored wire that deposits 2-1/2% Ni deposit with an 80 ksi tensile
strength.
It may be used with CO2 or Argon mixtures, which reduce spatter and further improve weldability.
B It is used commonly used on shipbuilding and heavy machinery construction. L
R The weld metal analysis is similar to AFM E8018-C1 low hydrogen electrode. •
Z A
C Mn P S Si Ni
T H
0.12 1.50 0.030 0.030 0.80 1.75 ~ 2.75
I •
Tension Test Requirements:

M psi 90,000 ~ 110,000 C
MPa 620 ~ 760
G psi 78,000 I
MPa 540
Elongation in 2” (%) 17 Min.
T N
S •
T Standard Packaging: K
0.045” 1.2 mm
33 Lb Spools
1/16’ 1.6 mm
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
160
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E308HT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E308HT1-1/-4 is formulated for MAG welding of 18% Cr - 8% Ni stainless steel for high temperature
service. (SUS 304H, 307H & 308H).
It is titania type flux cored wire for all position welding.
B L
R AFM E308HT1-1/-4 provides low spatter, easy slag removal & excellent weld soundness for your welding job. •
Z It is also developed for welding steel resistant to austenitic fluency type CrNi / AISI 304H in working A
temperatures up to +600 ºC [+1,112 ºF].
[Recommended Welding Tips]

T • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or Ar + 20% ~ 25% CO2 gas.
H
I • The optimum gas flow - For CO2 Gas - 20l/min ~ 25l/min [42.40 cfh ~ 53 cfh]. •
T • It is strongly recommended to use the wind shield screen to prevent the possible blowholes. F
- Wind velocity ≥ 2m/sec [≥ 6.56 ft/sec]
• Electrode Extension -15 mm ~ 25 mm [0.56” ~ 0.98”].
M C
Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%):
A •
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No.
G I
AWS Classification 0.04 ~ 0.08 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 9.0 ~ 11.0 -
AFM 308HT1-1/-4 0.06 0.60 1.04 0.02 0.007 19.50 10.00 6.0
T Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: N

S Tensile Strength Elongation •
T (N/mm2) - MPa % K
AWS Classification ≥ 550 ≥ 35
A AFM 308HT1-1/-4 580 40
S
E
Available sizes & Recommended Welding Parameters (DC+): •
R
1/16” E
O 0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm)
Position / Diameter
Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V)
M Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 S
A Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 •
I Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30 W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
161
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & E308LT1-1/-4 are designed for MAG welding of low carbon 18% Cr ~ 8% Ni
stainless steel.
• AFM E308LT0-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for flat & horizontal position welding.
B • AFM E308LT1-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for all position welding. L
R •
Z AFM E308LT series wires provide stable arc, easier slag removal, less spatter & welding fume than solid wires. A
The weld metal with optimum ferrite contents in its austenitic structures provides excellent weldability and
lower crack susceptibility.
T [Recommended Welding Tips]
H
I • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 80% Ar + 20% CO2 gas. •
T F
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No.
M AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 9.0 ~ 11.0 - C
A AFM 308LT0-1/-4 0.03 0.65 1.35 0.020 0.010 19.60 9.60 8 •
G AFM 308LT1-1/-4 0.03 0.62 1.38 0.022 0.009 19.80 9.80 10 I
Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal:

T Charpy V-Notch N
Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
S Impact Value •
T (N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % -20 ºC [-68 ºF] K
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 30
AFM 308LT0-1/-4 431 570 39 48 J [35.40 ft/lb]
A
AFM 308LT1-1/-4 422 572 41 46 J [33.93 ft/lb] S
E
•
R
Available sizes & Recommended Welding Parameters (DC+): E
O
1/16”
Product 0.045” (1.2 mm)
Position / Diameter (1.6 mm)
M AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) S
A Flat AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 •
I Horizontal Fillet AFM E308LT0-1/-4 & AFM E308LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N Vertical Up AFM E308LT1-1/-4 Only 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
162
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E309LMoT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E309LMoT1-1/-4 is a titania type of flux cored wire for all-position welding.
This product is designed for MAG welding of low carbon 22% Cr ~12% Ni-Mo stainless steels.
B • Dissimilar joint welds ; of and between high-strength, mild steels and low-alloyed QT-steels, stainless, ferritic L
R Cr- and austenitic Cr-Ni steels, manganese steels. •
Z • Cladding ; for the first layer of corrosion resistant weld claddings on ferritic-pearlitic steels in boiler and A
pressure vessel parts up to fine-grained steel S500N.
Weld metals contain comparatively much more ferrite in their austenitic, therefore they provide better
T H
weldability together with superior heat resistance, and corrosion resistance for Mo-alloyed claddings
I the product is necessary for the 1st layer. •
T F
• Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas only.
M C
A Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): •
G C Mn Si P S Cr Ni Mo Ferrite No.
I
AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 21.0 ~ 25.0 12.0 ~ 16.0 2.0 ~ 3.0 -
AFM 309LMoT1-1/-4 0.035 1.20 0.60 0.017 0.010 22.80 13.30 2.50 20
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: •
T Charpy V-Notch K
Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
Impact Value
A (N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % 0 ºC [32 ºF]
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 25 S
E
AFM 309LMoT1-1/-4 560 680 33 40 J [29.50 ft/lb] •
R
E
O
Available sizes & Recommended Welding Parameters (DC+):
M 1/16”
0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm) S
A Position / Diameter
Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) •
I
Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N
Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
163
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4 C
•
T AWS/SFA A5.22
S
AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & E309LT1-1/-4 are designed for MAG welding of 22% Cr ~ 12% Ni steel and heat
resistant & dissimilar joint such as a stainless steel to carbon steel of low alloy steel.
Under layer welding on clad side groove claded stainless steel or carbon steel where stainless steel weld metal
B is overlayed.
L
R • AFM E309LT0-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for flat & horizontal position welding. •
Z • AFM E309LT1-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for all position welding. A
AFM E309LT series wires provide stable arc, easier slag removal, less spatter & welding fume than solid wires.
T The weld metal with optimum ferrite contents in its austenitic structures provides excellent weldability and H
lower crack susceptibility.
I •
T • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 80% Ar + 20% CO2 gas. F

M C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No. C
A AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 22.0 ~ 25.0 12.0 ~ 14.0 - •
G AFM 309LT0-1/-4 0.035 0.75 1.30 0.022 0.009 22.80 12.30 18 I
AFM 309LT1-1/-4 0.029 0.64 1.33 0.019 0.011 23.30 12.80 20
T N
S •
Charpy V-Notch
T Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
Impact Value K
(N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % 0 ºC [32 ºF]
A AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 30
S
E AFM 309LT0-1/-4 432 590 37 50 J [36.88 ft/lb]
•
R AFM 309LT1-1/-4 426 593 38 48 J [35.40 ft/lb]
E
O
M 1/16”
Product 0.045” (1.2 mm) S
A Position / Diameter (1.6 mm)
•
I AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4 Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V)
Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4
Horizontal Fillet AFM E309LT0-1/-4 & AFM E309LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up AFM E309LT1-1/-4 Only 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
164
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 C
AWS/SFA A5.22 •
T S
AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & E316LT1-1/-4 are designed for welding of low carbon 18%Cr ~12%Ni ~ 2% Mo
stainless steel.
Under layer welding on clad side groove claded stainless steel or carbon steel where stainless steel weld metal
B is overlayed. L
R • AFM E316LT0-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for flat & horizontal position welding. •
Z • AFM E316LT1-1/-4 is titania type of flux cored wire for all position welding. A
AFM E309LT series wires provide excellent usability with stable arc, less spattering, good bead appearance,
better slag removal, and less quantity of welding fume comparable to solid wire.
T Excellent weldability and increased creep resistance at elevated temperature. H
I •
T [Recommended Welding Tips] F
• Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 80% Ar + 20% CO2 gas.
M Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): C

A C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Ferrite No. •
G AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 17.0 ~ 20.0 11.0 ~ 14.0 - I
AFM 316LT0-1/-4 0.030 0.62 1.42 0.022 0.011 18.56 12.39 8
AFM 316LT1-1/-4 0.031 0.60 1.33 0.021 0.010 18.61 12.44 7
T N
S Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: •
T Yield Strength Tensile Strength Elongation
Charpy V-Notch K
Impact Value
(N/mm2) - MPa (N/mm2) - MPa % 0 ºC [32 ºF]
A AWS Classification ≥ 485 ≥ 30 S
E AFM 316LT0-1/-4 425 575 42 55 J [40.57 ft/lb] •
R AFM 316LT1-1/-4 422 578 42 58 J [42.78 ft/lb] E
O
M
Product 0.045” (1.2 mm)
1/16” S
A Position / Diameter (1.6 mm)
•
I AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V)
W
N Flat AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
Horizontal Fillet AFM E316LT0-1/-4 & AFM E316LT1-1/-4 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up AFM E316LT1-1/-4 Only 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
165
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E317LT1-1/-4 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E317LT1-1/-4 is formulated for MAG Welding of 19% Cr ~ 13% Ni ~ 3% Mo stainless Steels.
The principal area of application is process and chemical plant, shuipbuilding as well as nuclear plant
B industries (AISI 316L, 316LN, 317L, 317NL & UNS S31726) L
R AFM E317LT1-1/-4 is a titania type of flux cored wire with all-position welding. •
It has low spatter, easy slag removal & good weld soundness.
Z A
It also contains higher levels of Mo for increased corrosion-resistance when compared to AFM E316LT1-1/-4.

T • Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas. H
I • The optimum flow of CO2 for shielding is 20l/min. ~ 25l/min [42.40 cfh ~ 53 cfh]. •
T • It is strongly recommended to use the wind shield screen to prevent the possible blowholes. F
- Wind velocity ≥ 2m/sec [≥ 6.56 ft/sec]
• For multi-layer welding, keep preheat & inter-pass temperature below 150 ºC [302 ºF].
M C
A •
G Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): I
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
AWS Classification ≤ 0.04 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 12.0 ~ 14.0 3.0 ~ 4.0
T AFM 317LT1-1/-4 0.03 0.65 1.26 0.02 0.07 18.9 13.7 3.5 N
S •
T K
Tensile Strength Elongation
A
(N/mm2) - MPa % S
E
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 20 •
R
AFM 316LT1-1 610 36 E
O
M
1/16” S
A 0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm)
Position / Diameter •
I Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) W
N Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
I Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30 F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
166
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C
B
AFM E347T1-1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.22
T S
AFM E347T1-1 is formulated for MAG Welding of 18% Cr ~ 8% Ni-Nb stainless Steels.
(AISI 347, 321, ASTM A296; A157 Gr. C9; A320 Gr. B8C or D)
B AFM E347T1-1 is a titania type of flux cored wire with all-position welding. L
R It has low spatter, easy slag removal & good weld soundness. •
Nb componet improves the resistance to intergranular corrosion of the weld metal.
Z A
• Recommended shielding gas - 100% CO2 Gas or 75% ~ 80% Ar + 20% ~ 25% CO2 gas.
T • The optimum flow of CO2 for shielding is 20l/min. ~ 25l/min [42.40 cfh ~ 53 cfh]. H
I • It is strongly recommended to use the wind shield screen to prevent the possible blowholes. •
T - Wind velocity ≥ 2m/sec [≥ 6.56 ft/sec] F
• For multi-layer welding, keep preheat & inter-pass temperature below 150 ºC [302 ºF].
M C
A Typical Chemical Composition of all-weld-metal (%): •
G C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo I
AWS Classification ≤ 0.08 ≤ 1.0 0.5 ~ 2.5 ≤ 0.04 ≤ 0.03 18.0 ~ 21.0 9.0 ~ 11.0 8 x C ~ 1.0
AFM 347T1-1 0.03 0.60 1.26 0.02 0.07 19.3 10.1 0.40
T N
S •
T Typical Mechanical Properties of all-weld-metal: K
Tensile Strength Elongation Impact Value (J)
(N/mm2) - MPa % -18 ºC
A
AWS Classification ≥ 520 ≥ 30 S
E
AFM 347T1-1 586 41 60 •
R
E
O
1/16”
M 0.045” (1.2 mm)
(1.6 mm)
Position / Diameter S
A Current (A) Voltage (V) Current (A) Voltage (V) •
I Flat 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35 W
N Horizontal Fillet 180 ~ 220 25 ~ 35 200 ~ 280 25 ~ 35
Vertical Up 120 ~ 160 20 ~ 30 160 ~ 220 20 ~ 30
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
167
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C C
B •
AWS A5.22 Chemical Composition Requirements for Flux Cored Electrodes for Undiluted Weld Metal
T S
AFM C Cr Ni Mo Nb + Ta Mn Si P S N Cu Other
0.04 ~ 18.00 ~ 9.00 ~ 0.50~
E308HTX-X 0.75 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
0.08 21.00 11.00 2.50
B L
18.00 ~ 9.00 ~ 0.50 ~
R E308LTX-X 0.04
21.00 11.00
0.75 -
2.50
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 - •
Z E309TX-X 0.10
22.00 ~ 12.00 ~
0.75 -
0.50 ~
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
A
25.00 14.00 0.25
22.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 0.50 ~
E309LTX-X 0.04 0.75 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
25.00 14.00 2.50
T E309LMoTX-X 0.04
21.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 2.00 ~
-
0.50 ~
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
H
I 25.00 16.00 3.00 2.50
•
25.00 ~ 20.00 ~ 1.00 ~
T E310TX-X 0.20
28.00 22.50
0.75 -
2.50
1.00 0.03 0.03 - 0.75 - F
28.00 ~ 8.00 ~ 0.50 ~
E312TX-X 0.15 0.75 - 1.00 004 0.03 - 0.75 -
32.00 10.50 2.50
17.00 ~ 11.00 ~ 2.00 ~ 0.50 ~
M E316TX-X 0.08
20.00 14.00 3.00
-
2.50
1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 - C
A 17.00 ~ 11.00 ~ 2.00 ~ 0.50 ~ •
E316LTX-X 0.04 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
G 20.00 14.00 3.00 2.50 I
18.00 ~ 12.00 ~ 3.00 ~ 0.50 ~
E317LTX-X 0.04 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
21.00 14.00 4.00 2.50
18.00 ~ 9.00 ~ 8 x C Min. ~ 0.50 ~
E347TX-X 0.08 0.75 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 -
T 21.00 11.00 1.00 Max. 2.50 N
S E410TX-X 0.12
11.00 ~
13.50
0.60 0.75 - 1.20 1.00 0.04 0.03 - 0.75 - •
T 21.00 ~ 7.50 ~ 2.50 ~ 0.50 ~ 0.08 ~ K
E2209TX-X 0.04 - 1.00 0.04 0.03 0.75 -
24.00 10.00 4.00 2.00 0.20
24.00 ~ 8.50 ~ 2.90 ~ 0.50 ~ 0.10 ~ 1.50 ~
E2253TX-X 0.04 - 0.75 0.04 0.03 -
A 27.00 10.50 3.90 1.50 0.25 2.50
S
E * E904LTX-X - NO AWS Classfication
•
R
E
O WELDING PARAMETERS:
AFM’s flux cored stainless steel wires can be welded over an extensive
range of parameters with excellent results.
M
S
A Typical range (V-I) with 75% Ar + 25% CO₂
(Increase V by 1-2V with 100% CO₂) •
I
W
N In this table,, the “X” following the “T” refers to the position of welding.
(1 - All-Position Operation, 0 - Flat or Horizontal Operation)
Also, the “X” following the dash refers to the shielding medium. (-1 or -4)
I as shown in the AWS Classfication column in Table 2 of
A5.22/A5.22M:2010. F
N
C
F
W
O
168
A T
L O
M B
Flux Cored Wires
C Minimum Mechanical Properties C

B Tensile Strength Postweld •
AWS Classification Elongation (%)
T ksi MPa Heat Treatment S
E308HTX-X 80 550 30 -
E308LTX-X 75 520 30 -
B E309TX-X 80 550 30 - L
R E309LTX-X 75 520 30 - •
Z E309LMoTX-X 75 520 25 - A
E310TX-X 80 550 30 -
E312TX-X 95 660 22 -
T H
E316TX-X 75 520 30 -
I •
E316LTX-X 70 485 30 -
T F
E317LTX-X 75 520 20 -
E347TX-X 75 520 30 -
E410TX-X 75 520 20 (*)
M C
E2209TX-X 100 690 20 -
A •
E2253TX-X 11 760 15 -
G I
* Note: All mechanical properties listed are minimal values which may vary substantially with base plate, parameters and other
variables out of the manufacturer’s control.
T (*) E410TX-X - Postweld Heat Treatment: N

S Heat to 1,350 oF to 1,400 oF [730 oC to 760 oC], •
T hold for one hour (-0, +15 minutes), K
furnace cool at a rate not exceeding 200 oF per hour
to 600 oF [315 oC] and air cool to ambient.
A
S
E
Performance:: •
R
AFM’s flux cored stainless deposition rate is the highest E
O in the industry, commonly 3 times faster than manual
electrodes.
M
S
A Shielding Gases: •
I
W
N Argon + CO2
CO2
75% + 25% or 82% + 18%
100%
} Gas flow rate 25 – 35 Cu. Ft / Hr
I
The use of either mixed gas or CO₂ will ensure sound weld metal. The carbon content of the weld metal increases F
N
marginally with increased CO₂ content. Slag detachment behavior may alter slightly with gas composition and with base C
F metal, particularly when welding stainless to carbon steels. W
O
169
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
B AFM Product AWS Classification Page •
T AFM ER1100 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER1100 171 S
B AFM ER5183 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER5183 171 L
R AFM ER5356 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER5356 172 •
Z AFM ER5556 AWS/SFA A5.10 ER5556 172 A
T H
Aluminum Alloys 173 ~ 174
I •
Aluminum Welding Wires Chemical Compositions 175
T F
Standard Diameters and Packages - Aluminum Alloys 175
M C
A •
G Click to Download
I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
170
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C AFM ER1100 C
B AWS/SFA A5.10 •
T AFM ER1100 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 1100 and 3003 aluminum sheets, S
plates and shapes.
B It can be used on: L

R • Window Frames Food Processing Equipment, • Heat Exchangers Electrical Bus Bars, •
Z • Railroad Tank Cars Liquid Oxygen Containers, • Pressure Vessels Plating Racks
A
• Storage Tanks Food Containers, • Chemical Processing Towers
T AFM ER4043 H
I AWS/SFA A5.10 •
T F
AFM ER4043 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 2014, 5052, 6061, and 6101 (in various
conditions of heat treatment and 6063 sheets, plates and shapes).
M It is typically used on: C

A • Truck Bodies • Structural Members •
G • Pressure Vessels • Electrical Bus Bars I
• Petroleum Distribution Equipment
T
S
AFM ER4047 N
•
AWS/SFA A5.10
T K
AFM ER4047 12% Silicon Aluminum brazing rod is recommended for torch brazing and dip or furnace
brazing of the following grades of wrought aluminum: 1060, 1100, 3003, 5005, 6061, 6063, and cast alloys A612
A and C612 for lap or tee joints, rather than butt joints when used with the proper aluminum brazing flux.
S
E
•
R
O AFM ER5183 E
AWS/SFA A5.10
M AFM ER5183 is the optimum wire and rod for both strength and ductility, stronger than AFM ER5356 with S
A similar ductility, not quite as strong as AFM ER5556 but has better ductility.
•
I AFM ER5183 is most frequently used on 5083 base plate.
It is also used to weld 6061, 6063, 5086, 7005 and 7039 alloys. W
N
The most common applications are liquid oxygen and liquid nitrogen containers.
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
171
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
B AFM ER5356 •
T AWS/SFA A5.10 S
AFM ER5356 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 5050, 5052, 5083, 5154, 5356, 6061,
and 6063 aluminum alloys.
This wire is to be employed in all types of structural aluminum fabrication where post heat treatment is not
B L
feasible as a method of producing higher strength welded joints.
R The tensile properties of the base materials of the aluminum-magnesium type are not as drastically affected •
Z by the heat of the welding arc as are the heat-treated high strength aluminum alloys. A
Excellent for color match application.
T Examples of applications which utilize ER5356: H

I • Diesel Engine Bases Gun Mount Bases • Truck Frames Ship Superstructures •
• Architectural Structures Cargo Tanks • Armored Vehicles
T F
M
AFM ER5556 C
AWS/SFA A5.10
A •
AFM ER5556 wires and rods are generally recommended for welding 5083, 5086 and 5456 high tensile
G I
aluminum alloys.
This wire is to be employed in all types of structural aluminum fabrication where post heat treatment is not
feasible as a method of producing higher strength welded joints.
T The tensile properties of the base materials of the aluminum-magnesium type are not as drastically affected N
S by the heat of the welding arc as are the heat treated high strength aluminum alloys. •
T K
Examples of applications which utilize ER5556:
• Diesel Engine Bases Gun Mount Bases • Truck Frames Ship Superstructures
A • Bridges Storage Tanks
S
E
•
R
E
O
Other Types of AFM Aluminum
M Available upon Request:
S
A
•
I • 355.0 • 4047 (718)
W
N • 356.0 • 5154
• 4145 (716) • 5554
I • 2319 • 5654
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
172
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
356.0,
B A356.0,
511.0, 7004,
6005, 6061, •
201.0, 319.0, 333.0, 512.0, 7005, 6009,
T Base Metal 206.0, 354.0, 355.0,
357.0,
513.0, 7039, 6010,
6063, 6101,
5456 5454 S
A357.0, 6151, 6201,
224.0 C355.0 514.0, 710.0, 6070
413.0, 443.0, 6351, 6951
535.0 712.0
A444.0
B 1060, 1070,
ER4145 ER4145 ER4043a,b ER5356c,d ER5356c,d ER4043a,b ER4043b ER5356d ER4043b,d
L
1080, 1350
R •
1100, 3003,
Z Alc 3003
ER4145 ER4145 ER4043a,b ER5356c,d ER5356c,d ER4043a,b ER4043b ER5356d ER4043b,d A
2014, 2036 ER4145c ER4145c ER4145 - - ER4145 ER4145 - -
2219 ER2319a ER4145c ER4145b,c ER4043 ER4043 ER4043a, ER4043a,b - ER4043b
T 3004,
- ER4043b ER4043b ER5356f ER5356f ER4043b ER4043b,f ER5356d ER5356f H
Alc. 3004
I 5005, 5050 - ER4043b ER4043b ER5356f Er5356f ER4043b ER4043b,f ER5356d ER5356f
•
T 5052, 5652i - ER4043b ER4043f ER5356f ER5356f ER4043b ER5356c,f ER5356f ER5356f F
5083 - - ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5183d - ER5356d ER5183d ER5356d
5086 - - ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5356d - ER5356d ER5356d ER5356d
M 5154, 5254i - - ER4043f ER5356f ER5356f - ER5356f ER5356f ER5356f C
A 5454 - ER4043b ER4043f ER5356f ER5356f ER4043b ER5356c,f ER5356f ER5554c,f •
5456 - - ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5556d - ER5356d ER5556d
G I
6005, 6061,
6063, 6101,
ER4145 ER4145b,c ER4043b,f,g ER5356c,f ER5356c,f ER4043a,b,g ER4043b,f,g
6151. 6201,
6351, 6951
T 6009, 6010,
N
ER4145 ER4145b,c ER4043a,b,g ER4043 ER4043 ER4043a,b,g
S 6070 •
T 7004, 7005, K
7039, 710.0, - ER4043b ER4043b,f ER5356f ER5356d
712.0
511.0, 512.0,
A 513.0, 514.0, - - ER4043f ER5356f
S
E 535.0
•
R 356.0, A356.0,
357.0, A357.0,
ER4145 ER4145b,c ER4043b,h E
O 413.0, 443.0,
444.0
319.0, 333.0,
M 354.0, 355.0, ER4145c ER4145b,c,h
S
A C355.0
•
I 201.0, 206.0,
ER2319a,h
224.0 W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
173
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
B 1060, •
1100
T Base Metal
5154,
5086 5083
5052, 5005, 3004,
2219
2014,
3003
1070, S
5254i 5652i 5050 Alc. 3004 2036 1080,
Alc. 3003
1350
B 1060, 1070,
ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5356d ER4043b,d ER1100b,c ER4043b,d ER4145b,c ER4145 ER1100b,c ER1188b,c,h,j
L
1080, 1350
R •
1100, 3003,
Z Alc. 3003
ER5356c,d ER5356d ER5356d ER4043b,d ER1100b,c ER4043b,d ER4145b,c ER4145 ER1100b,c A
2014, 2036 - - - - ER4145 ER4145 ER4145e ER4145e
2219 ER4043 - - ER4043b ER4043a,b ER4043a,b ER2319a
T 3004,
ER5356f ER5356d ER5356d ER5356c,f ER5356c,f ER5356c,f H
Alc. 3004
I 5005, 5050 ER5356f ER5356d ER5356d ER5356c,d ER5356c,f
•
T 5052, 5652i ER5356f ER5356d ER5356d ER5654c,f,i F
5083 ER5356d ER5356d ER5183d
5086 ER5356d ER5356d
M 5154, 5254i ER5654f,i C
A •
Notes:
G 1. Service conditions such as immersion in fresh or salt water, exposure to specific chemicals, or a sustained high temperature I
(over 150ºF (66ºC)) may limit the choice of filler metals. AFM ER5183, ER5356, ER5556, and ER5654 are not recommended
for sustained elevated temperature service.
T 2. Recommendations in this table apply to gas shielded arc welding processes. For oxyfuel gas welding, only AFM ER1188, ER1100, N
S ER4043, ER4047, and ER4145 filler metals are ordinarily used. •
T 3. Where no filler metal is listed, the base metal combination is not recommended for welding. K
a. AFM ER4145 may be used for some applications.
b. AFM ER4047 may be used for some applications.
A c. AFM ER4043 may be used for some applications.
d. AFM ER5183, ER5356, or ER5556 may be used. S
E e. AFM ER2319 may be used for some applications. It can supply high strength when the weldment is postweld solution heat •
R treated and aged.
E
O f. AFM ER5183, ER5356, ER5554, and ER5654 may be used. In some cases, they provide
(1) improved color match after anodizing treatment, (2) highest weld ductility, and (3) higher weld strength.
AFM ER5554 is suitable for sustained elevated temperature service.
M g. AFM ER4643 will provide high strength in 1/2 in. (12mm) and thicker groove welds in 6XXX base alloys when postweld
solution heat treated and aged. S
A
h. Filler metal with the same analysis as the base metal is sometimes used. The following wrought filler metals possess the same •
I chemical composition limits as cast filler alloys: ER4009 and R4009 as RC355.0; ER4010 and R4010 as R-A356.0; and R4011
W
N as R-A357.0.
i. Base metal alloys 5254 and 5652 are used for hydrogen peroxide service. AFM ER5654 filler metal is used for welding both
alloys for service temperatures below 150ºF (66ºC).
I j. AFM ER1100 may be used for some applications.
F
N
C
F
W
O
174
A T
L O
M B
Aluminum Alloys
C C
Aluminum Welding Wires Chemical Compositions
B •
T Alloy Al Mg Fe + Si Fe Si Cu Mn Zn Ti Cr Be S
99.0 0.095
1100 - - - 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.05 0.10 - - -
Min. Max
2319 Rem 0.02 - 0.30 0.20 5.80 ~ 6.80 0.20 ~ 0.40 0.10 0.10 ~ 0.20 - -
B L
4043 Rem 0.05 - 0.80 4.50 ~ 6.00 0.30 0.05 0.10 0.20 - -
R •
4047 Rem 0.10 - 0.80 11.00 ~ 13.00 0.30 0.15 - - - -
Z 5356 Rem 4.50 ~ 5.50 - 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.10 0.06 ~ 0.20 0.05 ~ 0.20 -
A
5183 Rem 4.30 ~ 5.20 - 0.40 0.40 0.10 0.50 ~ 1.00 0.25 0.15 0.05 ~ 0.25 -
5554 Rem 2.4 ~ 3.0 - 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.50 ~ 1.00 0.25 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.05 ~ 0.20 -
T 5556 Rem 4.70 ~ 5.50 - 0.40 0.25 0.10 0.50 ~ 1.00 0.25 0.05 ~ 0.20 0.05 ~ 0.20 - H
I 4145 Rem 0.15 - 0.80 9.0 ~ 10.70 3.30 ~ 4.70 0.15 0.20 - 0.15 - •
T F
Standard Diameters & Packages

M C
0.030” 0.035” 3/64” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32”
A Package
(0.8 mm) (0.9 mm) (1.2 mm) (1.6 mm) (2.4 mm) (3.2 mm) (4.0 mm) •
G 1 Lb Spool I
16 Lb Spool
10 Lb Tube (36”)
T N
S 44 Lb Spools, 88 Lb Reels & 15 Lb Coils are also available upon request. •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
175
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C C
AFM 1C ECoCr-C AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-C 177
AFM 6C ECoCr-A AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-A 178
B AFM 12C ECoCr-B AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-B 179 L
R AFM 21C ECoCr-E AWS/SFA A5.13 ECoCr-E 180 •
Z A
Bare Wires
T H
I •
AFM 1B ERCoCr-C AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-C 177
T F
AFM 1M ERCCoCr-C AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCoCr-C 177
AFM 6B ERCoCr-A AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-A 178
M AFM 6M ERCCo-Cr-A AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCo-Cr-A 178 C

A AFM 12B ERCoCr-B AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-B 179 •
G AFM 12M ERCCoCr-B AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCoCr-B 179 I
AFM 21B ERCoCr-E AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCoCr-E 180
AFM 21M ERCCoCr-E AWS/SFA A5.21 ERCCoCr-E 180
T N
S •
T Typical Physical and Mechanical Properties - Cobalt Alloys 181 K
Preheat & Postheat Treatment - Cobalt Alloys 182
A Welding Parameters & Data - Cobalt Alloys 182
S
E
•
R
E
O
Click to Download
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
176
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C AFM 1B ERCoCr-C C
B •
T AFM 1M ERCCoCr-C AFM 1C ECoCr-C S
AWS/SFA A5.21 AWS/SFA A5.13
Description:
B AFM #1 Cobalt is designed for applications that require extreme abrasion resistance at elevated temperatures, L
R but where impact resistance is not a consideration. •
Z It has a higher carbon and tungsten content than other cobalt alloys causing the weld deposit to have a higher A
volume of carbides within its microstructure.
Although the weld deposits of AFM #1 Cobalt are not as “tough” as those of AFM #6 Cobalt, they are much
harder and have excellent resistance to solid particle erosion.
T H
I Typical Applications: •
T Seals, rotors, steam turbine parts, mixer blades, extrusion dies, saw blades, rolling mill guides, pump F
impellers, carbon scrapers, engine crossheads, hydrapulper disc parts.
Chemical Composition Requirements (%):

M C
A AFM 1B ERCoCr-C: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
2.00 ~ 3.00 1.00 2.00 26.00 ~ 33.00 3.00
Mo Fe W Co Total Other
T 1.00 3.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 1M ERCCoCr-C:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
2.00 ~ 3.00 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 33.00 3.00
A Mo Fe W Co Total Other S
E 1.00 5.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 1C ECoCr-C: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 1.70 ~ 3.00 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 33.00 3.00
Mo Fe W Co Total Other S
A
1.00 5.00 11.00 ~ 14.00 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I
3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm
S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
177
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C AFM 6B ERCoCr-A C
B •
T AFM 6M ERCCoCr-A AFM 6C ECoCr-A S
Description:
B AFM #6 Cobalt is our most popular and useful cobalt alloy, offering excellent balance between impact, heat, L
R corrosion and metal-tometal abrasion resistance. •
Z It offers outstanding anti-galling properties, superior high temperature hardness and resistance to cavitation A
erosion making it perfect to use as valve trim in steam engines or repairing worn machine parts.
It is ideal for many hardsurfacing applications because of its resistance to mechanical and chemical degrada-
tion at extreme temperatures.
T H
T High pressure-high temperature valves, agitators, chain saw bars, digestors, hot oil pump parts, extruder F
screws, scraper knives, hot trimming dies, hot punches.

M C
A AFM 6B ERCoCr-A: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
0.90 ~ 1.40 1.00 2.00 26.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
T 1.00 3.00 7.00 ~ 9.50 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 6M ERCCoCr-A:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
0.70 ~ 1.40 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
E 1.00 5.00 3.00 ~ 6.00 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 6C ECoCr-A: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 0.70 ~ 1.40 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
A
1.00 5.00 3.00 ~ 6.00 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
178
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C
B
AFM 12B ERCoCr-B C
•
T AFM 12M ERCCoCr-B AFM 12C ECoCr-B S
Description:
B AFM #12 Cobalt is similar to AFM #6 Cobalt, however AFM #12 Cobalt offers greater resistance to hot and L
R cold abrasion at elevated temperatures. •
Z Weld deposits are harder than AFM #6 Cobalt deposits because of a higher carbide volume within A
its microstructure.
It is excellent for abrasion and corrosion resistance, but only moderate impact.
It is commonly used for cutting edges.
T H
T Tipping saw blades, chipping knives, paper slitters, cutter rolls, drawing dies, turbine blades, impeller pumps, F
conveyor screws, valve seats, cold working tools.

M C
A AFM 12B ERCoCr-B: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
1.20 ~ 1.70 1.00 2.00 26.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
T 1.00 3.00 7.00 ~ 9.50 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 12M ERCCoCr-B:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
1.20 ~ 2.00 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
E 1.00 5.00 7.00 ~ 10.00 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 12C ECoCr-B: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 1.00 ~ 1.70 2.00 2.00 25.00 ~ 32.00 3.00
A
1.00 5.00 7.00 ~ 9.50 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
179
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C
B
AFM 21B ERCoCr-E C
•
T AFM 21M ERCCoCr-E AFM 21C ECoCr-E S
B Description: L
R AFM #21 Cobalt offers excellent high temperature strength and stability. •
The addition of molybdenum gives it work hardening capability, making AFM #21 Cobalt excellent for hit
Z trimming dies, extrusion dies and hot shears.
A
It has good anti-galling properties and excellent resistance to cavitation erosion and corrosion thereby making
AFM #21 Cobalt an excellent choice for fluid seats.
T H
Hot forming dies, hot working tools, pump shafts, high pressure-high temperature valves, valve seats, mixer
T F
blades, mill cutters, pump mill screws, gas turbines.

M C
A AFM 21B ERCoCr-E: •
G C Mn Si Cr Ni I
0.15 ~ 0.45 1.5 1.5 25.00 ~ 30.00 1.50 ~ 4.00
T 4.50 ~ 7.00 3.00 0.50 Bal. 0.50 N
S •
AFM 12M ERCCoCr-E:
T K
C Mn Si Cr Ni
0.15 ~ 0.40 2.00 1.50 25.00 ~ 30.00 1.50 ~ 4.00
E 4.50 ~ 7.00 5.00 0.50 Bal. 1.00 •
R
AFM 21C ECoCr-E: E
O
C Mn Si Cr Ni
M 0.15 ~ 0.40 1.50 2.00 24.00 ~ 29.00 2.00 ~ 4.00
A
4.50 ~ 6.50 5.00 0.50 Bal. 1.00 •
I
W
N Available Sizes:
Bare & Coated Wire
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm 0.045” 1.2 mm F
N
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm S
C
F M D
5/32” 4.0 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm W
O S
180
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C C
B Typical Physical & Mechanical Properties •
T AFM #1 Bare AFM #6 Bare AFM #12 Bare AFM #21 Bare S
Alloy
AFM #1 CTD AFM #6 CTD AFM #12 CTD AFM #21 CTD
52 ~ 55 42 – 45 48 – 51
Oxyfuel N/A
B 1 Layer 1 Layer 1 Layer L
R Hardness
TIG
51 – 54 40 – 43 46 – 49 25 – 27 2 Layers •
Rockwell C 2 Layers 2 Layers 2 Layers 45 Work Hardened
Z A
50 – 53 39 – 42 41 – 44 24 – 26 2 Layers
Metal Arc
2 Layers 2 Layers 2 Layers 45 Work Hardened
Metal to Metal Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
T Not
H
I Impact Excellent Good Excellent •
Recommended
T Wear Erosion Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent F
Resistance
Corrosion Excellent Excellent Excellent Excellent
Cold Abrasion Excellent Good Excellent Good
M Hot Abrasion Excellent Good Excellent Goo C
A Machinability
Use Carbide Use Carbide Use Carbide Use Carbide •
G Tools Tools Tools Tools I
Density Lbs/in³ 0.312 0.303 0.308 0.300
Melting Point 2,300 ºF 2,350 ºF 2,345 ºF 2,460 ºF
T Tensile Strength 111,000 psi 134,000 psi 141,000 psi 117,000 psi N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
181
A T
L O
M B
Cobalt Alloys
C C
B
Preheat & Postheat Treatment* •
T Base Metal Preheat Temp. Postheat Temp. S
Low Carbon Steel (up to 0.40% C) for thin sections only Not Required Air-Cool
Low Carbon Steel (up to 0.40% C) for thick sections only and
B High Carbon Steel (over 0.40% C) for thin sections only and 200 ºF ~ 600 ºF Slow-Cool L
R Low Alloy Steel (up to 10% alloy) for thin sections only •
Z High Carbon Steel (over 0.40% C) for thick sections only and A
300 ºF ~ 600 ºF Slow-Cool
Low Alloy Steel (up to 10% alloy) for thick sections only
Air-Quench Steels 1,100 ºF ~ 1,200 ºF Slow-Cool
High Chromium-Nickel (Austenitic) Stainless Steels
T (304, 309, 316, etc.) thin sections only
Not Required Air-Cool H
I High Chromium-Nickel (Austenitic) Stainless Steels •
200 ºF ~ 500 ºF Slow-Cool
T (304, 309, 316, etc.) thick sections only F
Maintain at 400º ~ 600ºF for
High Chromium (Martensitic) Stainless Steels 4 hrs. per inch thickness,
400 ºF ~ 600 ºF
(410, 416, 420, etc.) thick sections only then reduce heat 90ºF per
M hour till cool
C
A Maintain at 200º ~ 600ºF for
•
G High Chromium (Ferritic) Stainless Steel 4 hrs. per inch thickness, I
200 ºF ~ 600 ºF
(430, 442, 446, etc.) thick sections only then reduce heat 90ºF per
hour till cool
T High Temperature Nickel Alloys N
200 ºF ~ 500 ºF Stress-Relieve
(400, 600, 601, 625, 718, etc.)
S •
T *In many cases, preheating or postheat treatment is not necessary. However, it will reduce the chances of cracking in both the base K
metal and the weld deposit. The preheat or postheat temperatures will depend upon the carbon content of the base metal.
The higher the carbon content – the higher the preheat temperature
A
S
E
Welding Parameters & Data •
R
E
O
Recommended Current Settings (SMA) Approximate Coverage Per Pound of Cobalt Alloy
(Coated)
M Thickness of Pounds Per Square Inch
Diameter
DC+
AC Deposit (in.) Bare Coated S
A (reverse polarity)
•
I 1/8” 85 ~ 100 90 ~ 120
1/8” 26 18
3/16” 17 12 W
N 5/32” 120 ~ 150 135 ~ 160 1/4” 13 9
3/16” 150 ~ 175 160 ~ 180
I 1/4” 200 ~ 250 220 ~ 270
F
N
C
F
W
O
182
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
AFM Phosphorous Bronze C AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuSn-C 184
AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuAl-A2 185
B L
R •
Z Bare Wires A
AFM Deoxidized Copper AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCu 186
T H
AFM Silicon Bronze AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuSi-A 187
I •
AFM Alum-Bronze A1 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuA1-A1 188
T F
AFM Alum-Bronze A2 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuAl-A2 189
AFM 40 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNiMnAl 190
M AFM 46 AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuNiA1 191 C

A AFM Phos-Bronze A AWS/SFA A5.7 ERCuSn-A 192 •
G I
Bare Wires
T AFM Product AWS Classification Page N
S AFM Low Fuming Bronze AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-C 193 •
T AFM Nickel Silver AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-D 194 K
A
S
E
•
R Click to Download
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
183
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Phosphorous Bronze C •
T AWS/SFA A5.6 Class ECuSn-C S
Description:
AFM Phosphorous Bronze C electrodes are used to join phosphor bronzes of similar compositions.
B It is also useful for joining brasses and, in some cases, for welding them to cast iron and carbon steel. L
R The higher tin content in AFM Phosphorous Bronze C results in weld metals of higher hardness, tensile •
Z and yield strength than in the Phosphorous Bronze A weld metal. A
The weld metals tend to flow sluggishly, requiring preheat and interpass temperatures of at least 400ºF (205ºC)
on heavy sections.
Postweld heat treatment may not be necessary, but it is desirable for maximum ductility, particularly
T H
if the weld metal is cold worked.
I •
T Chemical Composition Requirements (%): F
Cu* Zn Sn Mn Fe Si
Bal. (a) 7.00 ~ 9.00 (a) 0.25 (a)
M Ni** P Al Pb Total Other C
A (a) 0.05 ~ 0.35 0.01 0.02 0.50 •
G *including Silver (Ag) I
**including cobalt (Co)
a. These elements must be included in Total Other elements.
T N
S •
T Mechanical Property Requirements (Min.): K
psi 40,000
Tensile Strength
A MPa 280
Elongation in. 4 x D S
E 20
gage length, (%) •
R
E
O
Standard Sizes:
M 3/32” 2.4 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
A 1/8” 3.2 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm •
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
184
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 •
T AWS/SFA A5.6 Class ECuAl-A2 S
Description:
AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 is used for joining aluminum bronzes of similar composition, high strength
B copper-zinc alloys, silicon bronzes, manganese bronzes, some nickel alloys, many ferrous metals and alloys, L
R and combinations of dissimilar metals. •
Z It is also suitable for surfacing wear- and corrosion-resistant bearing surfaces. A
It is used only in the flat position.
Applications:
T For butt joints, a 90 degree single V-groove is recommended for plate thicknesses up to and including H
I 7/16 in. (11 mm), and a modified U- or double V-groove is recommended for the heavier plate thicknesses. •
T F
Preheat and interpass temperature should be as follows:
For iron-base materials, 200 to 300ºF (95 to 150ºC).

M For bronzes, 300 to 400ºF (150 to 210ºC). C
A For brasses, 500 to 600ºF (260 to 315ºC). •
G I
Cu* Zn Sn Mn Fe
Bal. (a) (a) (a) 0.50 ~ 5.00
T N
Si Ni** Al Pb Total Other
S •
1.50 (a) 6.50 ~ 9.00 0.02 0.50
T *including Silver (Ag) K
**including cobalt (Co)
a. These elements must be included in Total Other elements.
A All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. S
E
•
R Mechanical Property Requirements (Min.): E
O psi 60,000
Tensile Strength
MPa 410
M Elongation in. 4 x D
20 S
A gage length, (%)
•
I
W
N
Standard Sizes:
I 3/32” 2.4 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
1/8” 3.2 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
185
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C AFM Deoxidized Copper C

B AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCu •
T S
Description:
AFM Deoxidized Copper is generally used for the welding of deoxidized and elecrolytic tough pitch copper.
B Reactions with hydrogen in oxygenfree copper, and the segregation of copper oxide in tough pitch copper may L
detract from joint efficiency.
R It can be used to weld these base metals when the highest quality is not required.
•
Z A
Applications:
For thick base metals, gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is preferred.
T Conventional joint designs consistent with good welding practice are generally satisfactory. H
I An external source of preheating generally is not needed when welding base metal 1/4” (6.4mm) and thinner •
T in thickness. F
Preheating in the range of 400 to 1000ºF (205 to 540ºC) is desirable when welding base metal thicker than
1/4” (6.4mm) if high-quality welds are to be obtained.
M Chemical Composition Requirements (%): C

A Cu* Sn Mn Si •
G 98.00 Min. 1.00 1.00 0.50 I
P Al Pb Total Other
0.15 0.01 0.02 0.50
T *including Silver (Ag) N
T K
Hardness & Tensile Strength:
psi 25,000
A Minimum Tensile Strength
MPa 172 S
E
Brinell Hardness, Rockwell F •
R 25
(average value for an as-welded deposit) E
O
M Standard Sizes:
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm S
A
0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm •
I
W
N 1/16” 1.6 mm
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
186
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C AFM Silicon Bronze C

B AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuSi-A •
T S
Description:
AFM Silicon Bronze is a copper-base alloy containing approximately 3 percent of silicon, it may also contain
B small percentages of manganese, tin, or zinc. L
It is used for gas tungsten (GTAW) and gas metal arc welding (GMAW) of coppersilicon and copper-zinc base
R metals, to themselves and also to steel.
•
Z A
Applications:
When gas metal arc welding (GMAW) with AFM Silicon Bronze, it is generally best to keep the weld pool
T small and the interpass temperature below 150ºF (65ºC) to minimize hot cracking. H
The use of narrow weld passes reduces contraction stresses and also permits faster cooling through
I •
the hot-short temperature range.
T When gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW), best results are obtained by keeping the weld pool small. F
Preheating is not required.
Welding can be done in all positions, but the flat position is preferred.
M C
A Chemical Composition Requirements (%): •
G Cu* Zn Sn Mn Fe I
Bal. 1.00 1.00 1.50 0.50
Si Al Pb Total Other
T 2.80 ~ 4.00 0.01 0.02 0.50 N
S *including Silver (Ag) •
T K
A psi 50,000
Minimum Tensile Strength S
E MPa 345
•
R Brinell Hardness,
80 ~ 100 E
O (average value for an as-welded deposit)
M Standard Sizes: S
A 0.023” 0.6 mm 1/16” 1.6 mm •
I 0.030” 0.8 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm W
N
0.035” 0.9 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
I 0.045” 1.2 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
187
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Alum-Bronze A1 •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuA1-A1 S
Description:
AFM Aluminum Bronze A1is an iron-free aluminum bronze.
B It is recommended for use as a surfacing metal for wear-resistant surfaces having relatively light loads, L
R for resistance to corrosive media such as salt or brackish water, and for resistance to many commonly used •
Z acids in varying concentrations and temperatures. A
It is not recommended for joining.

T H
Cu* Zn Mn Si
I •
Bal. 0.20 0.50 0.10
T F
Al Pb Total Other
6.00 ~ 8.50 0.02 0.50
*including Silver (Ag)
A •
G I
psi 55,000
Minimum Tensile Strength
T MPa 345 N
S Brinell Hardness, •
80 ~ 110
T (average value for an as-welded deposit) K
A Standard Sizes: S
E 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
•
R 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm E
O 1/16” 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
188
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Alum-Bronze A2 •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuA1-A2 S
Description:
AFM Aluminum Bronze A2 is an iron-bearing aluminum bronze and is generally used for joining alumi-
B num bronzes of similar composition, manganese, silicon bronzes, some copper-nickel alloys, ferrous metals L
R and dissimilar metals. •
Z The most common dissimilar metal combinations are aluminum bronze to steel and copper to steel. A
It is used to provide wear- and corrosion-resistant surfaces.
T Cu* Zn Fe Si H
I Bal. 0.02 1.50 0.10 •
T Al Pb Total Other F
8.50 ~ 11.00 0.02 0.50
A Hardness & Tensile Strength: •
G psi 60,000 I
MPa 414
Brinell Hardness (GTAW only)
130 ~ 150
T (average value for an as-welded deposit) N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
A 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm S
E
1/16” 1.6 mm •
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
189
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM 40 •
T AWS /SFA A5.7 ERCuNiMnAl S
Description:
AFM 40 manganese-nickel-aluminum bronze filler metal used for joining and repairing of cast or wrought
B base metals of similar composition. L
R This filler metal may also be used for surfacing applications where high resistance to corrosion, erosion, •
Z or cavitation is required. A

T Cu* Zn Mn Fe Pb H
I Bal. 0.15 11.00 ~ 14.00 2.00 ~ 4.00 0.02 •
T Al Si Ni** Total Other F
7.00 ~ 8.50 0.10 1.50 ~ 3.00 0.50
M **including Cobalt (Co) C
•
G I
psi 75,000
T Minimum Tensile Strength N
MPa 515
S •
T 160 ~ 200 K
(average value for an as-welded deposit)
A
S
E Standard Sizes: •
R 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
E
O 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
1/16” 1.6 mm
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
190
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM 46 •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuNiA1 S
Description:
AFM 46 nickel-aluminum bronze is used for joining and repairing of cast or wrought nickel-aluminum
B bronze base metals. L
R •
Z Chemical Composition Requirements (%): A
Cu* Zn Mn Fe Si
Bal. 0.10 0.60 ~ 3.50 3.00 ~ 5.00 0.10
T Ni** Al Pb Total Other H
I 4.00 ~ 5.50 8.50 ~ 9.50 0.02 0.50 •
T *including Silver (Ag) F
**including Cobalt (Co)
M C
A •
G Hardness & Tensile Strength: I
psi 72,000
MPa 480
T Brinell Hardness (GTAW only) N
160 ~ 200
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
A 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
S
E 0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
•
R 1/16” 1.6 mm
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
191
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Phos-Bronze A •
T AWS/SFA A5.7 Class ERCuSn-A S
Description:
AFM Phosphorous Bronze A contains about 5 % tin and up to 0.35 % phosphorous added as a deoxidizer.
B Tin increases wear resistance of the weld metal and slows the rate of solidification by broadening L
R the temperature differential between the liquidus and solidus. •
Z This slower solidification increases the tendency to hot shortness. A
To minimize this effect, the weld pool should be kept small and welding time as short as possible.
AFM Phosphorous Bronze A can be used to weld bronze and brass. It also can be used to weld copper
if the presence of tin in the weld is not objectionable.
T H
I •
T F
Cu* Sn P
Bal. 4.00 ~ 6.00 0.10 ~ 0.35
Al Pb Total Other
M C
0.01 0.02 0.50
A *including Silver (Ag) •
T Hardness & Tensile Strength: N

S psi 35,000 •
T MPa 240 K
70 ~ 85
A
S
E
•
R Standard Sizes: E
O 0.035” 0.9 mm 3/32” 2.4 mm
0.045” 1.2 mm 1/8” 3.2 mm
M
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
192
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Low Fuming Bronze •
T AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-C S
Description:
AFM Low Fuming Bronze is a brazing alloy used on steels, copper, copper alloys, nickel, nickel alloys,
B and stainless steel. It is used with the torch, furnace, and induction brazing processes. L
R Fluxing is required, and a borax-boric acid flux is commonly used. Joint clearances •
Z from 0.002 to 0.005 in. (0.05 to 0.13 mm) are suitable. A

T Cu Zn Sn Fe Mn H
I 56.00 ~ 60.00 Bal. 0.80 ~ 1.10 0.25 ~ 1.20 0.01 ~ 0.50 •
T Pb (a) Al (a) Si Total Other F
0.05 0.01 0.04 ~ 0.15 0.50
a. The total of these elements shall not exceed the value specified in Total Other.
M C
A •
G Nominal Temperature Ranges: I
Solidus Liquidus Brazing Temperature Range
ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF ºC
T 1,590 866 1,630 888 1,670 ~ 1,750 910 ~ 954 N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
1/16” 1.6 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm
A
3/32” 2.4 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 5/16” 8.0 mm •
R
5/32” 4.0 mm 3/8” 9.5 mm E
O
M Also available in Flux Coated Bronze:

Standard Sizes: S
A
3/32” 2.4 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm •
I
1/8” 3.2 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm W
N
10 Lb Tubes / 50 Lb Master Carton
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
193
A T
L O
M B
Bronze Alloys
C C
B AFM Nickel Silver •
T AWS/SFA A5.8 Class RBCuZn-D S
Description:
AFM Nickel Silver is a brazing filler metal primarily used for brazing tungsten carbide.
B It is also used with steel, nickel, and nickel alloys. L
R It can be used with all brazing processes. •
Z It is unsuitable for furnace brazing in a protective atmosphere. A

T Cu Zn Ni P H
I 46.00 ~ 50.00 Bal. 9.00 ~ 11.00 0.25 •
T Pb (a) Al (a) Si Total Other F
0.05 0.01 0.04 ~ 0.25 0.50
a. The total of these elements shall not exceed the value specified in Total Other.
A •
G Nominal Temperature Ranges: I
Solidus Liquidus Brazing Temperature Range
ºF ºC ºF ºC ºF ºC
T 1,690 921 1,715 935 1,720 ~ 1,800 938 ~ 982 N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
1/16” 1.6 mm 5/32” 4.0 mm
A 3/32” 2.4 mm 3/16” 4.8 mm S
E
1/8” 3.2 mm 1/4” 6.4 mm •
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
194
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C C
T AFM ERTi-1 AWS/SFA A5.16 196 S
AFM ERTi-2 AWS/SFA A5.16 197
AFM ERTi-5 AWS/SFA A5.16 198
B AFM ERTi-7 AWS/SFA A5.16 199 L
R AFM ERT1-23 AWS/SFA A5.16 200 •
Z A
Welding Considerations - Titanium Alloys 201

T H
Specification Cross Index - Titanium Alloys 202 ~ 203
I •
Guide to Choice of Filler for General Titanium Welding 204 ~ 205
T F
Chemical Composition Requirements for Titanium and Titanium Alloy 206 ~ 207
M C
A •
G I
Click to Download
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
195
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-1 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-1 (Grade 1) is the lowest strength unalloyed (or Commercially Pure-CP) grade.
B L
Applications:
R AFM ERTi-1 (Grade 1) is used in applications where ductility is paramount, such as explosive cladding, •
Z loose linings, expanded metal, and deep drawing applications. A
It is also used in electrolytic applications like coated anode substrates for production of chlorine and sodium
chlorate.
T * ERTi-1 is no longer recommended for Grade 2 in structural applications. H
I •
C O N H Fe
0.03 0.03 ~ 0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08
M Al V Pd Ru Ni C
A - - - - - •
* All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” N
S 0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
196
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-2 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-2 (Grade 2) is the “workhorse” of the industrial corrosion market and most common unalloyed
B (or Commercially Pure-CP) grade. L
It is generally the most readily available in all product forms and has the lowest cost.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM ERTi-2 (Grade 2) is used for process equipment like pressure vessels, columns, tanks, heat exchangers,
shafts, blowers and fans, condenser tubing, valves. fittings. and pipe.chlorate.
T * ERTi-2 is no longer recommended for Grade 3 in structural applications. H
I •
C O N H Fe
0.03 0.08 ~ 0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12
M Al V Pd Ru Ni C
A - - - - - •
G I
Standard Sizes:
T 0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” N
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
197
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-5 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-5 (Grade 5, Ti 6Al-4V), commonly called “6-4,” is the most common and widely used alloy
B grade due to its relatively low cost and good availability. L
It has a UTS of 130,000 psi [895 MPa] minimum, good weldability, and can be heat treated to a higher strength
R •
or toughness.
Z A
Applications:
AFM ERTi-5 (Grade 5) is used in aircraft components such as landing gear, wing spars, and compressor
T blades. H
I Its corrosion resistance is generally comparable to Grade 2 and it is often used in corrosion service where •
higher strength is required, particularly in shafts, high strength bolting, and keys.
T Also its high strength, ability to be heat treated, weldability, excellent fatigue strength, and hardness make
F
this alloy excellent for industrial fans, pressure vessels, aircraft components, compressor blades,
and automotive and jet engine parts.
M C
G C O N H Fe I
0.05 0.12 ~ 0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22
Al V Pd Ru Ni
T 5.5 ~ 6.75 3.5 ~ 4.5 - - - N
S * All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. •
T K
Standard Sizes:
0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32”
A 0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
198
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-7 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-7 (Grade 7) has the same mechanical properties as ERTi-2 (Grade 2).
B The 0.12 wt % palladium addition improves corrosion performance under mildly reducing conditions or L
where crevice or under-deposit corrosion is a problem.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM ERTi-7 (Grade 7) can be considered for welding ERTi-2 (Grade 2) or 16 where improved corrosion
performance is desired.
T This alloy extends the use of titanium into mildly reducing media, to much higher chloride levels, or where H
I the environment fluctuates between oxidizing and reducing.
•
C O N H Fe
0.03 0.08 ~ 0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12
M C
Al V Pd Ru Ni
A •
- - 0.12 ~ 0.25 - -
G * All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted. I
Standard Sizes:
T 0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32” N
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
199
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C
B
AFM ERTi-23 C
•
AWS/SFA A5.16
T S
Description:
AFM ERTi-23 (Grade 23, Ti 6Al-4V) is comparable in chemical composition to Grade 5, but slightly lower
B aluminum and lower levels of oxygen and other interstitial elements improve fabricability, weldability, and L
toughness.
R •
Z Applications: A
AFM ERTi-23 (Grade 23) is used in many high strength industrial applications such as shafts where very
high strength, but better toughness and fabricability than Grade 5 is desired.
T This grade is often specified for marine and offshore energy production components that are exposed to H
I low temperature seawater due to higher fracture toughness values than Grade 5. •
With special processing, this alloy can develop high fracture toughness.
T Primary uses are in surgical implants, cryogenic vessels, and airframe components.
F
* ERTi-23 (Grade 23) was classified “ERTi-5ELI” formerly.
ELI = Extra Low Interstitial
M C
G C O N H Fe I
0.03 0.03 ~ 0.11 0.012 0.005 0.20
Al V Pd Ru Ni
T 5.5 ~ 6.5 3.5 ~ 4.5 - - - N
S •
T K
Standard Sizes:
0.030” 0.035” 0.045” 1/16” 3/32” 1/8” 5/32”
A
0.8 mm 0.9 mm 1.2 mm 1.6 mm 2.4 mm 3.2 mm 4.0 mm S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
200
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C C
B Welding Considerations •
T S
Titanium and Titanium Alloys can be welded by gas tungsten arc. gas metal arc. plasma arc. and electron beam
welding processes.
Titanium is a reactive metal and is sensitive to emhrittlement by oxygen, nitrogen, and hydrogen, at elevated tempera-
B tures. L
R Consequently, the metal must be protected from atmospheric contamination. •
This can be provided by shielding the metal with welding grade inert gas as specified in A WS A5.32/A5.32M,
Z Specification for Welding Shielding Gases, for classes SG-A or SG-He or by having mixtures of these single shielding gas A
classes surrounding the arc as molten or solidified hot weld metal.
Welding can also be done remotely in a chamber or in a glove hag.
T These chambers can be purged of air and back filled with inert gas, or, if they are rigid gas tight walls, can, be evacuated H
to at least 10-4 torr [0.01 3 Pa] to remove any air contaminants.
I •
T During arc welding, the titanium should be shielded from the ambient air atmosphere until it has cooled below 800°F F
[430°C].
Adequate protection by auxiliary inert gas shielding can be provided when welding is being performed in ambient air
atmosphere.
M Ventilation and exhaust at the arc must be carried out in such a manner that the protective inert gas shielding C
A (arc shielding, trailing shielding, or root shielding) is not impaired. •
G I
The titanium metal should be free of thick oxide and be chemically clean prior to welding, as contamination from oxide,
water, grease, or dirt will also cause embrittlement.
T Titanium welding rods should be chemically dean and free of heavy oxide, absorbed moisture, grease, and dirt. N
S If the hot end of the filler metal is removed from the gas shield prior to cooling and then reused, it contributes to weld •
contamination.
T K
The welding rod should be added by a technique that keeps the hot end within the torch gas blanket.
If the rod tip becomes contaminated, the discolored end should be cut off before reusing.
A Titanium can be successfully fusion welded to zirconium, tantalum, niobium, and vanadium, although the weld metal S
E will be stronger and less ductile than the parent metals.
•
R Titanium should not be fusion welded to other commonly welded metals such as copper, iron, nickel, and aluminum,
as brittle titanium intennetallic alloys are formed which produce extremely brittle welds. E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
201
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Specification Cross Index - Including Discontinued Titanium Electrodes C

B Base •
Filler Metal
T Metal S
AWS Classfication Aerospace Japan ASTM/
UNS ISO
Materials JIS ASME
Numbers Classficationa
2007 2004 1990 1970 Specification Z3331b Grades
B L
R ERTi-1 ERTi-1 ERTi-1 ERTi-1 R50100 4951 STi-0100 YTx 28 1 •
Z ERTi-2 ERTi-2 ERTi-2 ERTi-2 R50120 - STi-0120 YTx-35 2 A
ERTi-3 ERTi-3 ERTi-3 ERTi-3 R50125 - STi-0125 YTx 49 3
ERTi-4 ERTi-4 ERTi-4 ERTi-4 R50130 - STi-0130 - 4
T ERTi-5 ERTi-5 ERTi-5 ERTi-6Al-4V R56402 4954 STi-6402c YTAx 640 5 H

I ERTi-7 ERTi-7 ERTi-7 ERTi-0.2Pd R52401 - STi-2401 YTx 49Pd 7
•
ERTi-9e ERTi-9ELId ERTi-9ELI ERTi-3Al-2.5V-1 R56321 - STi-6321 - N/A
T F
Ytx 28 Pd,
ERTi-11 ERTi-11 - - R52251 - STi-2251 11
YTx35 PD
ERTi-12 ERTi-12 ERTi-12 - R53401 - STi-3401 - 12
M ERTi-13 ERTi-13 - - R53423 - STi-3423 - 13 C
A ERti-14 ERTi-14 - - R53424 - STi-3424 - 14 •
G ERT--15A ERTi-15A - - R53416 - STi-3416 - 15 I
ERTi-16 ERTi-16 - - R52403 - STi-2403 - 16
ERTi-17 ERTi-17 - - R52253 - STi-2253 - 17
T ERTi-18 ERTi-18 - - R56326 - STi-6326 - 18 N
S ERTi-19 - - - R58641 - STi-8641 c - 19 •
T ERTi-20 - - - R58646 - STi-8646 c - 20 K
ERTi-21 - - - R58211 - c - 21
STi-8211
ERTi-23 ERTi-23 ERTi-5ELI ERTi-6Al-4V-1 R56408 4956 STi-6408 YTAx 640E 23
A ERTi-24 ERTi-24 - - R56415 - STi-6415 - 24 S
E ERTi-25 ERTi-25 - - R56413 - STi-6413 - 25 •
R ERTi-26 ERTi-26 - - R52405 - STi-2405 - 26
E
O ERTi-27 ERTi-27 - - R52255 - STi-2255 - 27
ERTi-28 ERTi-28 - - R56324 - STi-6324 - 28
M ERTi-29 ERTi-29 - - R56414 - STi-6414 - 29
S
A ERTi-30 ERTi-30 - - R53531 - STi-3531 - 30
•
I (Continued)
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
202
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Specification Cross Index - Including Discontinued Titanium Electrodes C

B Base •
Filler Metal
T Metal S
AWS Classfication Aerospace Japan ASTM/
UNS ISO
Materials JIS ASME
Numbers Classficationa
2007 2004 1990 1970 Specification Z3331b Grades
B L
R ERTi-31 ERTi-31 - - R53533 - STi-3533 - 31 •
Z ERTi-32 ERTi-32 - - R55112 - STi-5112 - 32 A
ERTi-33 ERTi-33 - - R53443 - STi-3443 - 33
ERTi-34 ERTi-34 - - R53444 - STi-3444 - 34
T ERTi-36 - - - R58451 - STi-4841c - 36 H

I •
ERTi-38 - - - R54251 - c - 38
STi-5451
- ERTi-6 ERTi-5Al-2.5Sn R54522 4953 STi-5631 YTAx 525 -
T Discontinued
F
- Discontinued ERTi-6ELI ERTi-5Al-2.5Sn-1 R54523 - STi-5631 - -
- Discontinued ERTi-9 ERTi-3Al-2.5V R56320 - STi-6320 YTAx 325 9
- Discontinued ERTi-15 ERTi-6Al-2Cb-1Ta-1Mo R56210 - STi-5621 - -
M C
- Discontinued ERTi-8Al-1Mo-1V - - - - -
A •
- Discontinued ERTi-13V-11Cr-3Al - - - - -
G I
a
The International system for Ti filler metal specifications has been published as ISO 24034:2005.
Welding Consumables - Solid wires and rods for fusion welding of titanium and titanium alloys - Classification.
The four-digit numbers in most instances are truncatcd from the five-digit UNS R-series numbers.
b
T c
The “x” designates the filler metal form, B = rods, W = wire.
These designation numbers have been proposed for addition to ISO 24034:2005.
N
S d
e
Renamed ERTi-9 in this edition. •
The 2007 ERTi-9 composition ha” been specifically designed for welding Grade 9.
T It replaces the lower interstitial levels of the previous ERTi-9ELI. K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
203
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Guide to Choice of Filler Metal for General Titanium Welding C

B ASTM Base Metal •
Base Recommended Alternate
T Metal UTS (min.) YS (min.) Normal Filler Filler S
Grade ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] Compoosition Metal Metals Comments
1 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-1 - -

B ERTi-1 is no longer L
2 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-2 -
R recommended for Grade 2
in structural applications
•
Z 2H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-2 - Identical to Grade 2 except A
for higher tensile stength
ERTi-2 is no longer
65 [450] 55 [380] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-3 -
3 recommended for Grade 3
T in structural application H
I 4 80 [550] 70 [483] Ti (unalloyed) ERTi-4 - - •
T F
5 130 [895] 120 [828] Ti 6Al-4V ERTi-5 - -
6 - - - NAa - -
7 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.15Pd ERTi-7 - -
M C
7H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti 0.15Pd ERTi-7 - Identical to Grade 7 except
A for higher tensile strength •
G - - - - NAa - - I
9 90 [620] 70 [483] Ti 3Al-2.5V ERTi-9 - -
- - - - NAa - -
T 11 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti 0.15Pd ERTi-11 - N
S 12 70 [483] 50 [345] Ti 0.8Ni-0.3Mo ERTi-12 - •
T 13 40 [275] 25 [170] Ti 0.5Ni-0.05Ru ERTi-13 - K
14 60 [410] 40 [275] Ti 0.5Ni-0.05Ru ERTi-14 -
“A” suffix used to distinguish
A 15 70 [483] 55 [380] Ti 0.5Ni-0.05Ru ERTi-15A
from obsolete ERTi-5
S
E composition
ERTi-7 provide comparable •
R 16 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.05Pd ERTi-16 ERTi-7
mechanical properties and E
O equal or better corrosion
resistance
16H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti 0.05Pd ERTi-16 Identical to Grade 16 except
M for higher tensile strength
S
A 17 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti 0.05Pd ERTi-17 ERTi-11 provides
comparable mechanical •
I properties and equal or better W
N corrosion resistance
18 90 [620] 70 [483] Ti 3Al-2.5V ELI-0.05Pd ERTi-18
I 19 115 [793] 110 [759] Ti 3Al-8V-6Cr-4Zr-4Mo ERTi-19

F
N (Continued)
C
F
W
O
204
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Guide to Choice of Filler Metal for General Titanium Welding C

B ASTM Base Metal •
Base Recommended Alternate
T Metal UTS (min.) YS (min.) Normal Filler Filler S
Grade ksi [MPa] ksi [MPa] Compoosition Metal Metals Comments
20 115 [793] 110 [759] Ti 3Al-8V-6Cr-4Zr-4Mo-0.05Pd ERTi-20 - -

B 21 115 [793] 110 [759] Ti 3Al-15Mo-2.5Nb-0.2Si ERTi-21 - - L
R - - - - NAa - - •
Z 23 120 [828] 110 [759] Ti 6Al-4V ELI ERTi-23 - - A
24 130 [895] 120 [828] Ti 6Al-4V-0.05Pd ERTi-24 - -
25 130 [895] 120 [828] Ti 6Al-4V-0.5Ni-0.5Pd ERTi-25 - -

T H
I 26 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.10Ru ERTi-26 ERTi-7 ERTi-7 provides comparable
mechanical properties and
•
T equal or better corrosion F
resistance
26H 58 [400] 40 [275] Ti 0.10Ru ERTi-26 ERTi-7 Identical to Grade 26 except

M for higher tensile strength C
A •
G 27 35 [240] 20 [138] Ti 0.10Ru ERTi-27 ERTi-1 ERTi-11 provides
comparable mechanical
I
properties and equal or better
corrosion resistance
T 28 90 [620] 70 [483] Ti 3Al-2.5V ELI-0.10Ru ERTi-28 ERTi-18 ERTi-18 provides

comparable mechanical
N
S properties and comparable •
corrosion resistance
T K
29 120 [828] 110 [759] Ti 6Al-4VELI-0.10Ru ERTi-29 - -
30 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.3Co-0.05Pd ERTi-30 - -
A 31 65 [450] 55 [380] Ti 0.3Co-0.05Pd ERTi-31 - -
S
E 32 100 [689] 85 [586] Ti 5Al-1Sn-1Zr-1V-0.8Mo ERTi-32 - -
•
R 33 50 [345] 40 [275] Ti 0.4Ni-0.015Pd-0.015Ru-0.14Cr ERTi-33 - -
E
O 34 65 [450] 55 [380] Ti 0.4Ni-0.015Pd-0.015Ru-0.14Cr ERTi-34 - -
35 - - - NAa - -
M 36 65 [450] 60 [410] Ti 45Nb ERTi-36 - -
S
A 37 - - - NAa - -
•
I 38 130 [895] 115 [794] Ti 4Al-2.5V-1.5Fe ERTi-38 - -
W
N a
Either there is no current ASTM Grade or no corresponding AWS Filler Metal Grade.
Note: Properties in solution treated condition. Material is normally purchased in this condition and heat treated as required.
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
205
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Chemical Composition Requirements for Titanium and Titanium-Alloy Electrodes and Rods C
B Weight Percent a,b,c,d
•
T AWS
Classfication
UNS
Numbere C O N H Fe Al V Pd Ru Ni
Other
Elements Amount
S
ERTi-1 R50100 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - - - -
ERTi-2 R50120 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - - - -

B ERTi-3 R50125 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - - - -
L
R ERTi-4 R50130 0.03 0.18-0.32 0.025 0.008 0.25 - - - - -
•
Z ERTi-5 R56402 0.05 0.12-0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22 5.5-6.75 3.5-4.5 - - -
A
ERTi-7 R52401 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - 0.12-0.25 - -
ERTi-9 f
R56321 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.012 0.005 0.20 2.5-3.5 2.0-3.0 - - -
T ERTi-11 R52251 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - 0.12-0.25 - -
H
I ERTi-12 R53401 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.15 - - - - 0.6-0.9 Mo 0.2-0.4
•
T ERTi-13 R53423 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - - 0.04-0.06 0.4-0.6
F
ERTi-14 R53424 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - - 0.04-0.06 0.4-0.6
ERTi-15A R53416 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - - 0.04-0.06 0.4-0.6

M ERTi-16 R52403 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - 0.04-0.08 - -
C
A ERTi-17 R52253 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - 0.04-0.08 - -
•
G ERTi-18 R56326 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.012 0.005 0.20 2.5-3.5 2.0-3.0 0.04-0.08 - -
I
ERTi-19 R58641 Mo 3.5-4.5
0.03 0.06-0.10 0.015 0.015 0.20 3.0-4.0 7.5-8.5 - - -
Cr 5.5-6.5
Zr 3.5-4.5
T Mo 3.5-4.5 N
ERTi-20 R58646 0.03 0.06-0.10 0.015 0.015 0.20 3.0-4.0 7.5-8.5 0.04-0.08 - -
S Cr
Zr
5.5-6.5
3.5-4.5
•
T Mo 14.0-16.0 K
ERTi-21 R58211 0.03 0.10-0.15 0.012 0.005 0.20-0.40 2.5-3.5 - - - -
Nb 2.2-3.2
Si 0.15-0.25
A ERTi-23 R56408 0.03 0.03-0.11 0.012 0.005 0.20 5.5-6.5 3.5-4.5 - - -

S
E ERTi-24 R56415 0.05 0.12-0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22 5.5-6.75 3.5-4.5 0.04-0.08 - -
•
R ERTi-25 R56413 0.05 0.12-0.20 0.03 0.015 0.22 5.5-6.75 3.5-4.5 0.04-0.08 - 0.3-0.8
E
O ERTi-26 R52405 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - - 0.08-0.14 -
ERTi-27 R52255 0.03 0.03-0.10 0.012 0.005 0.08 - - - 0.08-0.14 -
M ERTi-28 R56324 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.012 0.005 0.20 2.5-3.5 2.0-3.0 - 0.08-0.14 -
S
A ERTi-29 R56414 0.03 0.03-0.11 0.012 0.005 0.20 5.5-6.5 3.5-4.5 - 0.08-0.14 -
•
I ERTi-30 R53531 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.015 0.008 0.12 - - 0.04-0.08 - - Co 0.20-0.80
W
N ERTi-31 R53533 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - 0.04-0.08 - - Co 0.20-0.80
(Continued)
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
206
A T
L O
M B
Titanium Alloys
C Chemical Composition Requirements for Titanium and Titanium-Alloy Electrodes and Rods C
B Weight Percent a,b,c,d
•
T AWS
Classfication
UNS
Numbere C O N H Fe Al V Pd Ru Ni
Other
Elements Amount
S
ERTi-32 R55112 0.03 0.05-0.10 0.012 0.008 0.20 4.5-5.5 0.6-1.4 - - - Mo 0.6-1.2
Si 0.06-0.14
Zr 0.6-1.4
B Sn 0.6-1.4 L
R ERTi-33 R53443 0.03 0.08-0.16 0.15 0.008 0.12 - - 0.01-0.02 0.02-0.04 0.35-0.55 Cr 0.1-0.2 •
Z ERTi-34 R53444 0.03 0.13-0.20 0.02 0.008 0.16 - - 0.01-0.02 0.02-0.04 0.35-0.55 Cr 0.1-0.2 A
ERTi-36 R58451 0.03 0.06-0.12 0.02 0.0035 0.03 - - - - - Nb 42.0-47.0
ERTi-38 R54251 0.05 0.20-0.27 0.02 0.010 1.2-1.8 3.5-4.5 2.0-3.0 - - -
T H
I a
Tiumium cunslilulc’ the remainder of 1he composition. •
T b
Single values are maximum. F
c
Analysis of Fe and the interstitial elements C, O, H. and N shall be conducted on samples of filler metal taken after the filler metal has been reduced to its final diameter
and all processing operations have been completed.
Analysis of the other elements may be conducted on these same samples or it may have been conducted on samplestaken from the ingot or the rod stock from which
M the filler metal is made.
In case of dispute, samples from the finished filler metal shall be the refree method.
C
A d
Any element intentionally added (O, Fe, N, and C) must be measured and reported. •
G Residual elements, total, shall not exceed 0.20%, with no single element exceeding 0.05%, except for yttrium, which shall not exceed 0.005%.
Residual elements need not be reported unless specifically required by the purchaser.
I
A residual element is any element present in the metal in small quantities that is inherent in the sponge or scrap additions, but not intentionally added.
In titanium these elements include, among others, aluminum, vanadium, tin, chromium, molybdenum, niobium, zirconium, hafnium, bismuth, ruthenium,
palladium, yttrium, copper, silicon, and cobalt.
T e
SAE HS-1086/ASTM DS-56, Metals & Alloys in the Unified Numbering System. N
f
S ERTi-9 now conforms to the lower interstiltial levels of the previous classfication ERTi-9ELI (AWS A5.16/A5.16M:2004). •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
207
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Guide to Choice of Filler for General Purpose Welding - Magnesium Alloys 209 ~ 210 •
T Chemical Composition Requirements - Magnesium Alloys 211 S
Welding Considerations - Magnesium Alloy 211
B L
R •
Z A
Please contact us
for MSDS
T H
I •
T F
M C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
208
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Guide to the Choice of Filler Metal for General Purpose Welding •
T Base AZ31B
S
AM100A AZ10A AZ61A AZ63A AZ80A AZ81A AZ91C AZ92A EK41A EZ33A
Metal AZ31C
AZ101A
AM100A
AZ92A
B AZ61A
L
R AZ10A AZ92A
AZ92A •
Z AZ31B
AZ92A
AZ61A AZ61A A
AZ31C AZ92A AZ92A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
AZ61A AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
T AZ63A C C C C
AZ61A H
AZ92A
I •
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
T AZ80A AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
C
AZ92A F
AZ61A
AZ81A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A
AZ92A
AZ61A
M AZ91C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A
AZ92A C
A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ101A •
G EK41A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A I
EZ33A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
HK31A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
HM21A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
T N
HM31A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
S HZ32A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A
•
T K1A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A EZ33A EZ33A K
LA141A D D EZ33A C C C C C C D D
M1A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
A MG1
AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
C
AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
S
E QE22A D D EZ33A D C D D D D EZ33A EZ33A
•
R ZE10A AZ92A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
C
AZ61A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
EZ33A EZ33A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A E
O ZE41A D D D D C D D D D EZ33A EZ33A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
ZK21A AZ92A C AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
M AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
S
A (Continued)
•
I
W
N
I Please contact us
for MSDS F
N
C
F
W
O
209
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Guide to the Choice of Filler Metal for General Purpose Welding (Continued) •
T Base M1A
S
HK31A HM21A HM31A HZ32A K1A LA141A QE22A ZE10A ZE41A ZK21A
Metal MG1
HK31A EZ33A
B HM21A EZ33A EZ33A

L
HM31A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A
R •
HZ32A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A
Z K1A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A
A
LA141A D EZ33A D D D EZ33A
M1A AZ61A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A D
T MG1 AZ92A H
QE22A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A C EZ33A
I •
EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A AZ61A EZ33A AZ61A
T ZE10A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
EZ33A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A F
ZE41A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A EZ33A D D EZ33A D EZ33A
AZ61A AZ61A AZ61A
ZK21A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A D AZ92A AZ92A
AZ92A AZ92A AZ92A
M C
A Notes: •
a. When more than one filler metal is given, they are listed in order of preference.
G b. The letter prefix (ER or R), designating usability of the filler metal, has been deleted, to reduce clutter in the table. I
c. Welding not recommended.
d. No data available.
When welding ZH62A, ZK51A, ZK60A, ZK61A; EZ33A is to be used.
T N
S •
T K
A Please contact us
S
E for MSDS
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
210
A T
L O
M B
Magnesium Alloys
C C
B Chemical Composition Requirements •
T AWS Rare Total
S
Mg Al Be Mn Zn Zr Cu Fe Ni Si
Class Earth Other
5.8 ~ 0.0002 ~ 0.15 ~ 0.40 ~
AZ61A REM - - 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.30
7.2 0.0008 0.5 1.5
B L
8.3 ~ 0.0002 ~ 0.15 ~ 1.7 ~
R AZ92A REM
9.7 0.0008 0.5 2.3
- - 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.30 •
Z AZ101A REM
9.5 ~ 0.0002 ~ 0.15 ~ 0.75 ~
- - 0.05 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.30
A
10.5 0.0008 0.5 1.25
2.0 ~ 0.45 ~ 2.5 ~
EZ33A REM - 0.0008 - - - - - 0.30
3.1 1.0 4.0
T H
I •
Welding Considerations
T F
Gas tungsten arc and gas metal arc welding are the most commonly used processes for welding magnesium alloys.
Plasma arc welding is also suitable for magnesium alloys.
M Oxyfuel gas welding should be used only for temporary repair work, when suitable arc welding equipment is not C
available.
A •
G Magnesium alloys are welded by the gas tungsten arc welding (GTAW) process using techniques and equipment similar I
to those used for aluminum.
Argon, helium, or mixtures of these gases are used for shielding.
Alternating current is preferred because of a combination of good arc cleaning action and good joint penetration,
T although direct current is also used.
N
S Direct current with the electrode positive provides excellent cleaning action but is limited to thin base metal. •
T Direct current with the electrode negative is sometimes used for mechanized welding with helium shielding gas to K
provide deep joint penetration.
GTAW is generally recommended for the welding of magnesium alloy castings.
A Welding is usually limited to the repair of defects in clean castings.
S
E
The basic principles for gas metal arc welding (GMAW) of magnesium alloys are the same as for other base metals. •
R The higher filler metal deposition rate of this process reduces the welding time, thereby reducing weld distortion and E
O fabrication costs.
Argon is generally used as a shielding gas; occasionally mixtures of argon and helium are used.
Pulsed GMAW and short circuit GMAW are both used for magnesium alloys.
M Higher welding current, to produce spray transfer of the filler metal without pulsing, is also used. S
A Globular transfer is not suitable. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
211
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
T AFM Pure Tungsten AWS/SFA A5.12 EWP (ISO 6848 - WP) 213 S
AFM 2% Thoriated AWS/SFA A5.12 EWTh-2 (ISO 6848 - WTh 20) 214
AFM 2% Ceriated AWS/SFA A5.12 EWCe-2 (ISO 6848 - WCe 20) 215
B AFM 1.5% Lanthanated AWS/SFA A5.12 EWLA-1.5 (ISO 6848 - WLa 15) 216 L
R •
Z A
Chemical Composition Requirements for Tungsten Electrodes 217
Standard Diameters & Lengths - Tungsten Electrodes 218
T H
Suitability of Current Supply Type - Tungsten Electrodes 219
I •
Approximate Current Ranges depending upon the Electrode Diameter 220
T F
Statement of Commission VII on Health Aspects
221
In The Use of Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes
M C
A •
G I
Click to Download
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
212
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM Pure Tungsten •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWP (ISO 6848 -WP) S
Description:
AFM Pure Tungsten electrodes are commercially pure & unalloyed tungsten electrodes.
B (99.5% Tungsten minimum). L
R Their current-carrying capacity is lower than that of other electrodes. •
Z They provide good stability when used with alternating current, either balanced wave or continuously high A
frequency stabilized.
They may be used with direct current and also with either argon or helium, or a combination of both,
as a shielding gas.
T H
They maintain a clean, balled end, which is preferred for aluminum and magnesium welding.
I These electrodes have reasonably good resistance to contamination of the weld metal by the electrode, •
T although the oxide containing electrodes are superior in this respect. F
EWP electrodes are generally used on less critical applications, except for welding aluminum and magnesium.
The lower cost EWP electrodes can be used for less critical applications where some tungsten contamination
M of welds is acceptable. C
A Tip color is Green. •
G I
W Min. 99.5
T Total Other 0.5 N
S •
T Typical Current Ranges: K
Alternating Current Alternating Current
Diameter Unbalance Ware Balanced Ware
A (amps) (amps)
S
E 0.040” (1.0 mm) 20 ~ 60 10 ~ 30
•
R 1/16” (1.6 mm) 50 ~ 100 30 ~ 80
E
O 3/32” (2.4 mm) 100 ~ 160 60 ~ 130
1/8” (3.2 mm) 150 ~ 200 100 ~ 180
M 5/32” (4.0 mm) 200 ~ 275 160 ~ 240
S
A All values are based on the usage of argon gas.
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
213
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM 2% Thoriated •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWTh-2 (ISO 6848 -WTh 20) S
Description:
AFM 2% Thoriated Tungsten electrodes have been designed for direct current applications.
B The higher thoria content (1.7–2.2 percent) in the EWTh-2 electrode causes the operating characteristic L
R improvements to be more pronounced than in the lower thoria content EWTh-1. •
Z They have the thoria content dispersed evenly throughout their entire length. A
They maintain a sharpened point well, which is desirable for welding steel.
They can be used on alternating current work, but a satisfactory balled end, which is desirable for the welding
of nonferrous metals, is difficult to maintain.
T H
Should it be desired to use these electrodes for alternating current welding, then balling can be accomplished
I by briefly, and carefully, welding with direct current electrode positive prior to welding with alternating •
T current. F
During alternating current welding, the balled end does not melt and so emission is not as good as from
a liquid ball on a pure tungsten (EWP) electrode.
M Tip color is Red. C
A •
G Chemical Composition Requirements (%): I
W 97.3
ThO2 1.7 ~ 2.2
T Total Other 0.5 N
S •
T Typical Current Ranges: K
DCEN DCEP
Diameter
(DCSP) (amps) (DCRP) (amps)
A
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 Not Applicable S
E
1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 10 ~ 20 •
R
3/32” (2.4 mm) 150 ~ 250 15 ~ 30 E
O
1/8” (3.2 mm) 250 ~ 400 25 ~ 40
5/32” (4.0 mm) 400 ~ 500 40 ~ 55
M
All values are based on the usage of argon gas. S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
214
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM 2% Ceriated •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWCe-2 (ISO 6848 -WCe 20) S
Description:
AFM 2% Ceriated Tungsten electrodes are tungsten electrodes containing about two percent cerium oxide
B (CeO2), referred to as ceria. L
R The EWCe-2 electrodes were first introduced into the United States market in 1987. •
Z Several other grades of this type electrode are commercially practical, including electrodes containing A
one percent CeO, but only one grade, EWCe-2, has been incorporated in this specification as having
commercial significance.
The advantages of tungsten electrodes containing ceria, compared to pure tungsten, include increased ease of
T starting, improved arc stability, and reduced rate of vaporization or burn-off. H
I Unlike thoria, ceria is not a radioactive material. •
T These advantages increase with increased ceria content. F
These electrodes operate successfully with alternating current or direct current, either polarity.
Tip color is Grey.
M Chemical Composition Requirements (%): C
A W 97.3 •
G CeO2 1.8 ~ 2.2 I
Total Other 0.5
T Typical Current Ranges: N

S Alternating Current Alternating Current •
T Diameter Unbalance Ware Balanced Ware K
(amps) (amps)
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 20 ~ 60
A 1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 60 ~ 120
S
E 3/32” (2.4 mm) 140 ~ 235 100 ~ 180
•
R 1/8” (3.2 mm) 225 ~ 325 160 ~ 250
E
O 5/32” (4.0 mm) 300 ~ 400 200 ~ 320
All values are based on the usage of argon gas.
M
DCEN DCEP S
A Diameter
(DCSP) (amps) (DCRP) (amps) •
I
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 Not Applicable W
N
1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 10 ~ 20
3/32” (2.4 mm) 150 ~ 250 15 ~ 30
I
1/8” (3.2 mm) 250 ~ 400 25 ~ 40 F
N
5/32” (4.0 mm) 400 ~ 500 40 ~ 55 S
C
F M D
All values are based on the usage of argon gas. W
O S
215
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B AFM 1.5% Lanthanated •
T AWS/SFA A5.12 EWLA-1.5 (ISO 6848 -WLa 15) S
Description:
AFM 1.5% Lanthanated Tungsten electrodes which contain 1.3-1.7 wt.-% of dispersed lanthanum oxide
B (La2O3) for enhanced arc starting and stability, reduced tip erosion rate, and extended operating range. L
R These electrodes can be used as nonradioactive substitutes for 2% thoriated tungsten as the operating •
Z characteristics are very similar. A
Lanthanated tungsten can be used for both dcen and ac applications.
Tip color is Gold.
T Chemical Composition Requirements (%): H

I W 97.8 •
T CeO2 1.3 ~ 1.7 F
Total Other 0.5
M Typical Current Ranges: C

A Alternating Current Alternating Current •
G Diameter Unbalance Ware Balanced Ware I
(amps) (amps)
0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 20 ~ 60
T 1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 60 ~ 120 N
S 3/32” (2.4 mm) 140 ~ 235 100 ~ 180 •
T 1/8” (3.2 mm) 225 ~ 325 160 ~ 250 K
5/32” (4.0 mm) 300 ~ 400 200 ~ 320
All values are based on the usage of argon gas.
A
S
E DCEN DCEP
Diameter •
R (DCSP) (amps) (DCRP) (amps)
E
O 0.040” (1.0 mm) 15 ~ 80 Not Applicable
1/16” (1.6 mm) 70 ~ 150 10 ~ 20
M 3/32” (2.4 mm) 150 ~ 250 15 ~ 30
S
A 1/8” (3.2 mm) 250 ~ 400 25 ~ 40
•
I 5/32” (4.0 mm) 400 ~ 500 40 ~ 55
All values are based on the usage of argon gas. W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
216
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C Chemical Composition Requirements for Tungsten Electrodes C

B •
Classification Chemical Composition Requirement Colour Code,
T Symbol RGB Colour Value
S
(ISO 6848 Impurities, Tungsten,
Principal Oxidie Mass Percent
Classification) Mass Percent Mass Percent & Colour Samplea
Green
B EWP
None N.A. b 0.5 max. 99.5 min. #008000 L
(WP)
R •
Z Grey (formerly orange) A
EWCe-2
CeO2 1.8 to 2.2 0.5 max. Balance #808080
(WCe 20)
T EWLa-1
Black H
La2O3 0.8 to 1.2 0.5 max. Balance #000000
I (WLa 10) •
T F
Gold
EWLa-1.5
La2O3 1.3 to 1.7 0.5 max. Balance #FFD700
(WLa 15)
M Blue C
EWLa-2
A (WLa 20) La2O3 1.8 to 2.2 0.5 max. Balance #0000FF •
G I
Yellow
EWTh-1
ThO2 0.8 to 1.2 0.5 max. Balance #FFFF00
(WTh 10)
T N
Red
S EWTh-2
ThO2 1.7 to 2.2 0.5 max. Balance #FF0000 •
(WTh 20)
T K
Violet
(WTh 30) ThO2 2.8 to 3.2 0.5 max. Balance #EE82EE
A
S
E
Brown •
R EWZr-1
ZrO2 0.15 to 0.50 0.5 max. Balance #A52A2A
(WZr 3) E
O
White
EWZr-8
M (WZr 8) ZrO2 0.7 to 0.8 0.5 max. Balance #FFFFFF
S
A
The manufacturer •
I The manufacturer
must state the The manufacturer may select
EWG must identify all 0.5 max. Balance W
N additions.
nominal quantity any color not already in use.
of each addition.
Note : Intentional additions of “doping oxides” other than indicated for a particular electrode classification is prohibited.
I a
RGB color values and color samples can be found at the following website: F
N http://msdn2.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms531197.aspx
C
F b
N.A. = Not Applicable.
W
O
217
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B Standard Diameters & Lengths •
T Size Length S
Diameter Tolerance Diameter Tolerance Length Tolerance Length Tolerance
mm ±mm in ±in mm ±mm in ±in
B 0.25b 0.02 0.010 0.001 50b ±1.5 L

R 0.30 b 0.02 75 b -1.0, +2.5 3 1/16 •
Z 0.50b 0.05 0.020 0.002 150b -1.0, +4.0 6 1/16
A
b 0.05 0.040 0.002 b -1.0, +6.0 7 1/8
1.00 175
b 0.05 a 0.002 b -1.0, +8.0 12 1/8
1.50 0.060 300
b 0.05 b -1.0, +8.0 18 1/8
T 1.60 450
H
b 0.05 b -1.0, +13.0 24 1/8
2.00 600
I •
2.40b 0.08 0.093 (3/32) 0.003
T b
F
2.50 0.08
b 0.10
3.00
b 0.10 0.125 (1/8) 0.003
3.20
M b
C
4.00 0.10 0.156 (5/32) 0.003
A •
4.80b 0.10 0.187 (3/16) 0.003
G 5.00 b 0.10
I
b 0.10
6.30
b 0.10 0.250 (1/4) 0.003
6.40
T 8.00 b 0.10 N
S •
T 10.00b 0.10 K
a Although the metric size 1.6 mm [0.063 in] is closer to 1/16 in [0.0625 in], it has been common industry practice to refer to
A the U.S. customary size 0.060 in as 1/16 in.
b Standard sizes and lengths in ISO 6848, though tolerances may be tighter in some cases. S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
218
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
B Suitability of Current Supply Type •
T Direct Current S
Alternating
Type of Metal or Alloy to be welded Electrode Electrode Current
Negative (-) Positive (+)
Aluminium and its alloys, thickness ≤ 2.5 mm [0.10 in] Acceptable Acceptable Best
B a
L
Aluminium and its alloys, thickness > 2.5 mm [0.10 in] Acceptable N.R. Best
R •
Magnesium and its alloys N.R. Acceptable Best
Z Non-alloy (Carbon) Steels and Low Alloy Steels Best N.R. N.R.
A
Stainless Steels Best N.R. N.R.
Copper Best N.R. N.R.
T Bronze Best N.R. Acceptable
H
I Aluminium Bronze Acceptable N.R. Best •
T Silicon Bronze Best N.R. N.R. F
Nickel and its alloys Best N.R. Acceptable
Titanium and its alloys Best N.R. Acceptable
M a
N.R. = Not Recommended. C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
219
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C Approximate Current Ranges depending upon the Electrode Diametera C

B Direc Current Alternating Current •
Electrode
T Diameter
A A
S
Electrode Negative (-) Electrode Positive (+)
Pure Tungsten with Pure Tungsten with Pure Tungsten with
mm in
Tungsten Oxide Additives Tungsten Oxide Additives Tungsten Oxide Additives
B 0.25 0.010 up to 15 up to 15 Not Applicable Not Applicable up to 15 up to 15 L
R 0.30 up to 15 up to 15 Not Applicable Not Applicable up to 15 up to 15 •
Z 0.50 0.020 2 to 20 2 to 20 Not Applicable Not Applicable 2 to 15 2 to 15 A
1.0 0.040 10 to 75 10 to 75 Not Applicable Not Applicable 15 to 55 15 to 70
1.5 0.060 60 to 150 60 to 150 10 to 20 10 to 20 45 to 90 60 to 125
1.6 60 to 150 60 to 150 10 to 20 10 to 20 45 to 90 60 to 125
T 2.0 75 to 180 100 to 200 15 to 25 15 to 25 65 to 125 85 to 160
H
I 0.093 •
2.4 120 to 220 150 to 250 15 to 30 15 to 30 80 to 140 120 to 210
T (3/32) F
2.5 130 to 230 170 to 250 17 to 30 17 to 30 80 to 140 120 to 210
3.0 150 to 300 210 to 310 20 to 35 20 to 35 140 to 180 140 to 230
0.125
M 3.2
(1/8)
160 to 310 225 to 330 20 to 35 35 to 50 150 to 190 150 to 250 C
A 4.0
0.156
275 to 450 350 to 480 35 to 50 50 to 70 180 to 260 240 to 350
•
(5/32)
G I
0.187
4.8 380 to 600 480 to 650 50 to 70 50 to 70 240 to 350 330 to 450
(3/16)
5.0 400 to 625 500 to 675 50 to 70 50 to 70 240 to 350 330 to 460
T 6.3 550 to 875 650 to 950 65 to 100 35 to 100 300 to 450 430 to 575 N
S 6.4
0.250
575 to 900 750 to 1000 70 to 125 70 to 125 325 to 450 450 to 600 •
(1/4)
T 8.0 650 to 830
K
10.0
A NOTE : If no value is given, no recommendation is available.

a
The current values are based on the use of argon gas, and these values may vary depending on the type of shielding gas, type of equipment, S
E and application.
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
220
A T
L O
M B
Tungsten Alloys
C C
Statement of Commission VIII on Health Aspects
B •
In The Use of Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes
T S
“Thorium oxides are found in Thoriated Tungsten Electrodes {up to 4.2% (ISO 6848-WT 40 Electrode)}6.
Thorium is radioactive and may present hazards by external and internal exposure.
B If alternatives are technically feasible, they should be used. L
R “Several studies carried out on Thoriated Electrodes have shown that due to the type of radiation generated, •
Z external radiation risks—during storage, welding, or disposal of residues—are negligible under normal A
conditions of use.
“On the contrary, during the grinding of electrode tips there is generation of radioactive dust, with the risk of
internal exposure.
T H
Consequently, it is necessary to use local exhaust ventilation to control the dust at the source, complemented
I if necessary by respiratory protective equipment. •
T The risk of internal exposure during welding is considered negligible since the electrode is consumed at a very F
slow rate.
“Precautions must be taken in order to control any risks of exposure during the disposal of dust from grinding
M devices. C
A “The above statement is based on a considered view of the available reports. Commission VIII will continue to •
keep these aspects under review.”
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
221
A T
L O
M B
Aerospace Alloys
C C
B AFM Product Page •
T Aluminum Alloy Filler Metals 223 S
Silver Brazing Filler Metals 223
Magnesium Alloy Filler Metals 223
B Nickel Base Brazing Filler Metals 223 L
R Titanium Alloy Filler Metals 223 •
Z Low Alloy Steels 223 A
Corrosion & Heat Resistant Steel and Alloy Filler Metals 224
T H
I •
T F
Please contact us
for MSDS
M C
A •
G I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
222
A T
L O
M B
Aerospace Alloys
C C
B Aluminum Alloy Filler Metals Nickel Base Brazing Filler Metals •
AMS AMS
T Spec.
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
Spec.
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition S
4180 1100 99.0 Al 73.0Ni 4.5Si 14.0Cr 3.1B
4775 BNi-1
4181 4008 (A356) 7.0Si 0.38Mg 0.10Ti 4.5Fe 0 .75C
B 4184 4145 10Si 4.0Cu 4777 BNi-2 82.0Ni 4.5Si 7.0Cr 3.1B 3.0Fe L
R 4185 4047 12Si •
Z 4190 4043 5.2Si Silver Brazing Filler Metals A
6.3Cu 0.30Mn 0.18Zr 0.15Ti AMS
4191 2319 Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
0.10V Spec.
4.5Cu 0.70Ag 0.30Mn 0.25Mg 4761 BAg-34 38.0Ag 32.0Cu 28.0Zn 2.0Sn
T 4233 201.0
0.25Ti 4763 BAg-7 56.0Ag 22.0Cu 17.0Zn 5.05 Sn H
I 4244 206.0 4.6Cu 0.35Mn 0.25Mg 0.22Ti 4765 BAg-13a 56.0Ag 42.0Cu 2.0Ni •
T 4245 355.0 5.0Si 1.2Cu 0.50Mg 4766 BAg-23 85.0Ag 15.0Mn F
4246 357.0 7.0Si 0.52Mg 4767 BAg-19 92.5Ag 7.2Cu 0.22Li
4768 BAg-2 35.0Ag 26.0Cu 21.0Zn 15.0Cu
M Low Alloy Steels
4769 BAg-1 45.0Ag 24.0Cd 16.0Zn 15.0Cu C
A 4770 BAg-1a 50.0Ag 18.0Cd 16.5Zn 15.5Cu
AMS •
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition 50.0Ag 16.0Cd 15.5Zn
G Spec. 4771 BAg-3
15.5Cu 3.0Ni
I
6452 4140VM 0.95Cr 0.20Mo (0.38- 0.43C)
4772 BAg-13 54.0Ag 40.0Cu 5.0Zn 1.0Ni
6453 Hy Tuf 0.30Cr 1.8Ni 0.40Mo (0.23-0.28C)
4773 BAg-18 60.0Ag 30.0Cu 10.0Sn
6456 4340VM 0.80Cr 1.8Ni 0.25Mo (0.35-0.40C)
T 4774 BAg-21 63.0Ag 28.5Cu 6.0Sn 2.5Ni N
6457 4140VM 0.95Cr 0.20Mo (0.28-0.33C)
S •
0.65Si 1.25Cr 0.50Mo 0.30V
T 6458 17-22A (S)
(0.28-0.33C) Titanium Alloy Filler Metals K
6461 6130VM 0.95Cr 0.20V (0.28-0.33C) AMS
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
6462 6130 0.95Cr 0.20V (0.28-0.33C) Spec.
A
6466 502 5.2Cr 0 .55Mo 4951 CP-Ti
0.08C 0.18O 0.005H S
E 0.05N 0.20Fe Ti Bal
1.0Cr 3.8Co 0.45Mo 0.08V •
R 6468 HP9-4-20
(0.14-0.17C) 4952 6-2-4-2 6.0Al 2.0Sn 4.0Zr 2.0Mo
E
O 4953 5Al 2.5Sn 5.0 Al-2.5 Sn
0.05C 0.12O 0.015H 0.03N
Magnesinum Alloy Filler Metals 4954 6Al-4V
6.75Al 4.50V 0.30Fe Ti Bal
M AMS
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition 0.08C 0.12O 0.01H 0.05N S
A Spec. 4955 8-1-1
8.0Al 1.0Mo 1.0V Ti Bal
4395 AZ92A 9.0Al 2.0Zn •
I 0.03C 0.08O 0.005H 0.012N
4396 EZ33A 3.3Ce 2.5Zn 0.72Zr W
N 4956 6Al-4V(ELI) 6.75Al 4.5V 0.15Fe 0.10Mn
4418 QE22A 2.5Ag 2.1Di 0.70Zr Ti Bal
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
223
A T
L O
M B
Aerospace Alloys
C C
Corrosion & Heat Resistant Steels and Alloy Corrosion & Heat Resistant Steels and Alloy
B •
Filler Metals Filler Metals
T AMS AMS
S
Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition Alloy Nominal Chemical Composition
Spec. Spec.
5675 Inconel 92 70.0Ni 15.5Cr 7.0Fe 3.0Ti 2.4Mn 15.0Cr 25.5Ni 1.3Mo 2.2Ti
5805 A286VM
B 5679 Inconel 62 73.0Ni 15.5Cr 2.2Cb 8.0Fe 0.004B 0.30V L
42.0Fe 38.0Ni 15.0Co
R 5680 347 Stainless 18.5Cr 11.0Ni 0.40(Cb+Ta) 5806 903
3.0(Cb+Ta) 1.4Ti 0.92Al
•
Z 5689 321 Stainless 18.0Cr 10.5Ni 0.40Ti
5812 15-7Mo VM 15.0Cr 7.1Ni 2.4Mo 1.0Al A
5692 316 Stainless 19.0Cr 12.5Ni 2.5Mo
5813 15-7Mo 15.0Cr 7.1Ni 2.4Mo 1.0Al
5694 310 Stainless 27.0 Cr 21.5Ni
Greek
5774 AM-350 16.5Cr 4.5Ni 2.9Mo 0.10N 5817 13.0Cr 2.0Ni 3.0W
T Ascoloy H
5776 410 Stainless 12.5Cr
I 72.0Ni 15.5Cr 2.4Ti 1(Cb+Ta)
5821 410 Mod 12.0Cr Ferrite Controlled •
5778 Inconel 69 11.8Cr 2.8Ni 1.6Co 1.8Mo
T 0.70Al 7.0Fe 5823 Jethete
0.32 V
F
20.5Cr 9.0Ni 0.50Mo 1.5W
5782 19-9WMo 5824 17-7PH 17.0Cr 7.1Ni 1.0Al
1.2(Cb+Ta) 0.20Ti
5825 17-4PH 16.4Cr 4.8Ni 0.22Cb 3.2Cu
5784 29-9 (312) 29.0 Cr-9.5Ni
M 5826 15-5PH 15.0Cr 5.1Ni 0.30Cb 3.2Cu C
5786 Hastelloy W 62.5Ni 5.0Cr 24.5Mo 5.5Fe
A 57.0Ni 19.5Cr 13.5Co 4.2Mo •
5789 Stellite 31 54.0Co 25.5Cr 10.5Ni 7.5W 5828 Waspaloy
G Multimet 31.0Fe 21.0Cr 20.0Ni 20.0Co
3.1Ti 1.4Al 0.006B I
5794 12.5Cr 42.5Ni 6.0Mo 2.7Ti
(N-155) 3.0Mo 2.5Wi 1(Cb+Ta) 0.15N 5830 901
0.015B 25.0Fe
Haynes 25
5796 52.0Co 20.0Cr 10.0Ni 15.0W 29Fe 22Cr 21Ni 18.5Co 3.2Mo
T (L-605)
5831 556 2.8W 0.78Ta 0.30Al 0.05Zr N
S 47.5Ni 22.0Cr 1.5Co 9.0Mo
5798 Hastelloy X
0.60W 18.5Fe
.05La 0.20N •
T 54.0Ni 19.0Cr 11.0Mo 3.2Ti 5832 718
52.5Ni 19.0Cr 5.1(Cb+Ta) K
5800 Rene 41 0.90Ti 0.50Al 18.0Fe
1.5Al 0.006B
5836 FM-82 72.0Ni 20.0Cr 3.0Mn 2.5Cb
39.0Co 22.0Cr 22.0Ni 14.5W
A 5801 Haynes 188
0.07La
5837 625 62.0Ni 21.5Cr 9.0Mo 3.7(Cb+Ta)
S
E 15.0Cr 25.5Ni 1.3Mo 2.2Ti 5838 Hastelloy S
65.0Ni 16.0Cr 15.0Mo 0.30Al
5804 A286 0.06 La •
R 0.006B 0.30V
5840 PH13-8Mo 13.0Cr 8.0Ni 2.3Mo 1.1Al E
O
Hastelloy®, Stellite®, Haynes® and Multimet® are registered
trademarks of Cabot Corporation.
M
S
A Inconel®, Incoloy® and Monel® are registered trademarks of
Special Metals Corporation. •
I
W
N Rene 41® is a registered trademark of Teledyne-Allvac.
Waspaloy® is a registered trademark of Pratt and Whitney

I Aircraft. F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
224
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C C
B AFM Product Page •
T AFM Patricarc 232 S
AFM AM Steel-LH 233
AFM AM Steel-1 234
B AFM AM Steel-2 235 L
R AFM Chamfer Arc 236 •
Z AFM AM Premium Cast-1 237 A
AFM Cast Weld-1 238
AFM Cast Weld-2 239
T H
AFM Cast Weld-3 240
I •
AFM Impact Arc 241
T F
AFM Abrasarc 242
AFM Bronze Arc 243
M AFM Bronze G 244 C
A AFM Alum Arc 245 •
G AFM Alum Cor 246 I
Cross Reference Guide - Maintenance Alloys 247

T N
S •
T K
Please contact us
A for MSDS
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
225
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Patricarc C
•
T • High deposition rate. S
• Weld deposits are smooth, ductile, porosity-free and take on a shiny appearance.
• Weld deposits are impact, abrasion, heat and corrosion resistant.
B • For uses such as: L
R Dissimilar steels, high carbon, tool and die steels, and aircraft steels. •
Underlayment of hardfacing alloys in mining applications, rebuilding shafts and agitator blades in turbines,
Z A
frames, cast steel parts and gears.
Also perfect to use when the base metal is unknown.
T Technical Data (Typical Value) H

I Tensile Strength Up to 120,000 psi •
T Hardness Yield Strength Up to 90,000 psi F
Elongation % Up to 30
Diameter 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16
M C
(mm) 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.0
A •
Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity 45 ~ 80 70 ~ 120 70 ~ 140 130 ~ 150
G I
Package Size (Lb) 10
T Procedure: N
Clean the work area.
S •
Thick sections should be beveled.
T A preheat of 400°F is recommended for carbon and cast steels. K
Maintain a short arc, slightly in the direction of movement and use stringer beads.
Peening is recommended.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
226
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Steel-LH C
•
T • High tensile strength ferritic electrode. S
• High quality, all position, low amperage electrode features rapid deposition.
• Deposits have good ductility, are dense, crack-free, and of x-ray quality.
B • Excellent for steels sensitive to cracking when welded with conventional mild steel electrodes. L
R • For uses such as: •
For “tramp” and “problem” steels high in sulphur, phosphorous, or other elements added to improve
Z A
the machinability of the steel.
For fabrication of “H” and “I” beams, angle and channel iron, pipelines, and all other steel structures.
For circular tubes to plate welds, and other type joints subject to stress and strain.
T H
I Technical Data (Typical Value) •
T Hardness Tensile Strength Up to 80,000 psi F
Diameter 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16 1/4
(mm) 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
M Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity 60 ~ 100 110 ~ 150 140 ~ 200 220 ~ 280 300 ~ 375
C
A •
G I
Procedure:
Area to be welded should be cleaned thoroughly.
T Surface contamination must be removed and bevel or chamfer where required. N
S Maintain close arc length. •
T Vertical joints should be welded from bottom up, using rapid weave technique. K
Do not whip. Use drag technique to make horizontal fillet welds.
Slag is easily removed.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
227
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Steel-1 C
•
T • Low amperage capability makes it excellent for poor fit-up applications and use on low, open circuit S
voltage buzz boxes.
• Special coating allows it to weld over extremely dirty, greasy, oil soaked and/or rusty steels.
B • Also can weld over its own slag without causing inclusions or slag interference. L
R • It is not necessary to chip slag between passes. •
• For uses such as:
Z A
Ideal for production, as well as maintenance applications where poor fit-up is encountered.
The ability to maintain a stable arc at low amperages also makes it excellent for applications involving light
gauge steel.
T Amsteel-1 easily welds on steel beams and girders that have many coats of paint without developing porosity H
I or defective welds. •
T Welds are also easily made on equipment or machines that are covered with grease and sand and can’t be F
cleaned before welding.
Designed for pipeline welding, tank fabrication, machine and automotive repair, as well as general construction
and fabrication.
M C
A •
Technical Data (Typical Value)
G I
Tensile Strength Up to 85,000 psi
Hardness Yield Strength Up to 60,000 psi
T Elongation % Approx. 25 N
S Diameter 3/32 1/8 5/32 •
T (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 K
Amperage: AC or DC Either Polarity 20 ~ 100 30 ~ 140 50 ~ 175
A Package Size (Lb) 10
S
E
Procedure: •
R
If possible, clean the weld areas as much as is practical. Set the amperage to the specific requirements. E
O
If an edge build-up is required or it is thin steel, use the lower end of the amperage range.
If heavy penetration is required or the weld area is extremely dirty, use the higher end of the amperage range.
M A close to medium arc gap should be maintained. S
A Slag chipping is recommended, but not necessary on multipass applications.
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
228
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Steel-2 C
•
T • Designed to operate on almost any AC or DC welding machine even when the open circuit voltage is S
very low.
• Special coating protects the weld deposit from adverse conditions normally encountered in maintenance
B repair welding. L
R • Low amperage requirement controls distortion when welding thin sheet metal; •
spatter is kept to a minimum.
Z A
• Ideal for field work and out-of-position welding.
Fabrication thin, medium, heavy and dissimilar gauge mild steel.
T Sheets, plates, angle iron, beams, pipes, and machine parts can be welded in all positions. H
I Also used for filling holes and build-up of over-machined and worn surfaces. •
T Commonly used on applications requiring short, intermittent and spot welds because of the outstanding F
restarting characteristics.

M C
Tensile Strength Up to 80,000 psi
A •
Hardness Yield Strength Up to 68,000 psi
G I
Elongation % Approx. 24
Diameter 1/16 3/32 1/8 5/32 3/16
T (mm) 1.6 2.4 3.2 4.0 5.0 N
S Amperage: AC or DC Either Polarity 20 ~ 25 35 ~ 80 65 ~ 125 90 ~ 160 120 ~ 210 •
T Package Size (Lb) 10 K
Procedure:
A Remove as much foreign material as practical from the weld area. S
E DC reverse polarity (electrode +) produces deep penetration; •
R DC straight polarity (electrode -) will have limited penetration and a flatter bead.
E
O AC prevents arc blow.
A medium arc length should be maintained with either stringer or weave beads.
M Slag is easily removed with a light chipping hammer.
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
229
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Chamfer Arc C
•
T • High speed cutting electrode for use with all standard arc equipment. S
• No special skills, oxygen tanks, or air compressors are required.
• Special coating protects the electrode from overheating.
R Cutting, beveling, and piercing of cast iron, stainless steel, manganese steel, carbon steel, malleable iron, •
aluminum, copper, bronze, nickel and nickel alloys.
Z A
Ideal for cleaning out defects and removing rivets.

T 1/8” to 1” (3.25 mm to 25 mm) 1/8” (3.2 mm) H
I Metal Thickness •
1/4” to 1 ½” (6.0 mm to 38 mm) 5/32” (4.0 mm)
T F
Diameter 1/8 5/32
(mm) 3.2 4.0
M Amperage: AC or DC Straight (-) 140 ~ 350 175 ~ 400 C
A Package Size (Lb) 10 •
G I
Procedure:
The fastest and cleanest cuts use DC straight polarity (electrode -).
When piercing, hold electrode vertical to work, strike arc, and push in and out until hole has been formed.
T N
When cutting sheets or plates, start at the edge, strike arc, and use electrode like a saw;
S push and pull with the electrode at a 45° angle to the work piece. •
T In all cases the arc must be kept as short as possible. K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
230
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM AM Premium Cast-1 C
•
T • High strength alloy for dirty cast iron. S
• Machinable deposits.
• Specially designed for contaminated, oil-soaked cast iron.
B • Alloyed core wire with unique flux coating produces strong, crack-resistant welds. L
Joining cast iron to steel, transmission gear housings, gray, ductile & nodular cast iron, sewer pipes.
Z A
Tensile Strength Up to 60,000 psi (415 N/mm2)
T Hardness HB 210 H
I C Ni Fe & Others •
T Chemistry F
1 55 Balance
Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0
Amperage 40 ~ 70 70 ~ 110 90 ~ 130
M Package Size (Lb) 3.5 5.0 5.0
C
A •
G Classifications Similar to: I
AWS/SFA A5.15 ENiFe-Cl
DIN 8573 ENiFe-2-BG11
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
231
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Cast Weld-1 C
•
T • Premium high nickel alloy for cast iron. S
• Maximum machinability of deposit and HAZ.
• Pulsating arc for low temperature welding of cast iron in all positions.
B • Pulsating arc removes impurities resulting in a porosity-free weld deposit. L
Engine blocks, joining cast iron to steel, gear housings, joining cast iron to stainless steels.
Z A
T Hardness HB 160 H
I C Ni Fe & Others •
T Chemistry F
0.70 96 Balance
Amperage 30 ~ 70 55 ~ 110 75 ~ 135
M Package Size (Lb) 2.5 5.0 5.0
C
A •
G Classifications Similar to: I
AWS/SFA A5.15 ENi-Cl
DIN 8573 ENi-BG11
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
232
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Cast Weld-2 C
•
T • Maximum strength alloy for cast iron. S
• Special bi-metal core wire prevents overheating of electrode.
• Soft arc allows for easy machinability of highly crack-resistant weld deposit.
B • Pulsating arc on DC- and AC removes impurities from base material, even on dirty, oily .....surfaces. L
R • Suitable for welding cast iron to steel. •
Z A
Cylinder heads, machine bases, ship engine manifolds, filling holes, cast gear teeth, pump housings.

T Tensile Strength Up to 75,000 psi (520 N/mm2) H
I Hardness HB 200 •
T C Ni Fe & Others F
Chemistry
0.70 54 Balance
M Amperage 35 ~ 80 65 ~ 120 75 ~ 140 C
A Package Size (Lb) 4.0 5.0 5.0 •
G I
Classifications Similar to:
AWS/SFA A5.15 ENiFe-Cl
T DIN 8573 ENiFe-1-BG11 N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
233
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Cast Weld-3 C
•
T • Nickel-free electrode with non-machinable deposit. S
• Formulated for dirty and difficult-to-weld cast iron.
• Suitable for joining problem cast iron to steel.
B • Successfully used when nickel alloys fail to adhere. L
Burned furnace grates, cracked machine bases, build up of abrasion, pump housings worn areas, low quality
Z A
cast iron.

I Yield Strength Up to 120,000 psi (827 N/mm2) •
T Hardness HB 350 F
Color Match Good
C Mn Fe & Others
M Chemistry C
0.40 1.00 Balance
A Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 •
G Amperage 35 ~ 80 75 ~ 110 100 ~ 150 I
Package Size (Lb) 5.0 5.0 5.0
T Classifications Similar to: N

S AWS/SFA A5.15 ESt •
T DIN 8573 EFe-2-BG11 K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
234
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Impact Arc C
•
T • High chromium, high manganese alloy for joining and rebuilding manganese and carbon steel plates. S
• High alloy deposits are very tough and will take extreme impact and abrasion conditions.
• Has excellent weldability with very low spatter.
B • Operates easily in all positions. L
Rebuilding and joining austenitic manganese steels and manganese steels to other steel combinations.
Z A
Especially designed for high impact applications such as rail frogs and switch points, roller crushers, hammers,
shovel tracks.
Also excellent for use as a base for harder overlays.
T H
T Hardness 16 ~ 19 - As Deposited work hardens to: Rc 48 F
Diameter (mm) 3.2 4.0 5.0 6.0
Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity (+) 110 ~ 135 125 ~ 190 150 ~ 250 225 ~ 325
M C
A •
G I
Procedure:
Remove any hardened or fatigued material from the surface with AFM Chamfer Arc.
Deposits may be placed with either the stringer bead or weaving technique.
T This electrode deposits easily in all positions with excellent build-up quality. N
S Avoid overheating on manganese steel bas metals. •
T Deposits work harden rapidly. K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
235
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Abrasarc C
•
T • General purpose surfacing alloy for surfaces subjected to abrasive wear and impact. S
• Crack resistant deposits, but can be forged.
• Heavy build-ups are possible without the need for softer cushion layers.
R Build-up and surfacing of new or worn machine parts of steel, cast steel, and manganese steel, dredger teeth, •
crusher jaws, hammer mill parts, conveyors, pressure rollers, shovel teeth, stampers, caterpillar drives,
Z A
and earth borers.

T Hardness 55 ~ 60 RC H
I •
T F
Amperage: AC or DC Reverse Polarity (+) 80 ~ 120 110 ~ 160 140 ~ 180
M C
A Procedure: •
G Remove all foreign material from weld area. Preheat is not necessary.
I
Maintain a medium arc length making either stringer beads or weave beads.
Allow part to cool slowly.
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
236
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Bronze Arc C
•
T • AC/DC+ Tin/Bronze electrode for joining and surfacing. S
• All position electrode with minimum spatter and easy slag removal.
• Excellent color match to bronze.
B • Offers good resistance to sea water and other chemicals. L
Arc brazing galvanized sheets, impellers, defects in new bronze castings, gear wheels
Z A
T H
Elongation % 30
I •
Hardness HB 80
T F
Cu Sn Fe & Others
Chemistry
94 4.50 Balance
M Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 C
A Amperage 80 ~ 120 100 ~ 150 125 ~ 190 •
G Package Size (Lb) 5.0 5.0 5.0 I
Classifications Similar to:

T AWS/SFA A5.6 ECuSn-C N
S DIN 1733 EL-CuMn7 •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
237
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Bronze G C
•
T • Super strength, general use brazing rod. S
• Excellent for overlaying & build-up at low temperatures (760°-870°C).
• Excellent for close fitting joints, thin-flowing at high temperatures (900°-955°C).
B • Designed to build-up or join carbon steels, alloy steels, cast iron, and many nonferrous materials. L
R • Super active flux promotes ultra-thin flowing of alloy. •
Z A
Gear teeth build-up, attaching carbide cutting tips, build-up of bearing shafts, joining bicycle assemblies,
brazing of rusty surface, heavy equipment repair.
T Technical Data (Typical Value) H

I Tensile Strength Up to 70,000 psi (483 N/mm ) 2
•
T Working Temperature 760°C ~ 955°C (1,400°F ~1,750°F) F
Remelt Temperature 980°C (1,800°F )
Hardness HB 135
M Cu Ni Zn C
A Chemistry •
48 10 42
G Diameter (mm) 2.5 3.2 4.0 I
T Classifications Similar to: N

S AWS/SFA A5.8 RBCuZn-D
•
T DIN 8513 L-CuNi10Zn42 K
• For best results, use a neutral flame.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
238
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Alum Arc C
•
T • Universal flux-coated aluminum stick electrode for arc welding or gas welding. S
• Ideal for outdoor use when MIG/TIG welding is not suitable.
• Exceptional arc stability at low amperages with minimum spatter.
B • Deposits have excellent corrosion resistance and color match. L
- Build-up of castings - Aluminum castings
Z A
- Repair of machining errors - Tanks & Pipes

I Hardness HB 40 ~55 •
T Color Match Good (will darken if anodized) F
Hardness HB 135
Chemistry Si Al & Others
M (Core Wire) 5.0 Balance C
A •
G I
Amperage 50 ~ 80 80 ~ 130 100 ~ 160
T N
S Classifications Similar to: •
AWS/SFA A5.3 E4043
T K
DIN 1732 EL-ALSi5
• For best results with a torch, use a slightly carburizing flame.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
239
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
C
B AFM Alum Cor C
•
T • Unique flux-cored aluminum brazing rod. S
• Excellent for build-up and repair of all weldable grades of aluminum including cast alloys.
• Designed expecially for dirty applications.
B • Can be applied in all positions using an oxy-fuel torch. L
R • Ideal for joining dissimilar sizes and for poor fit-up applications. •
Z A
- Cast engine blocks - Oily casting repairs
- Aluminum pump housings - Automotive parts
T H
T Tensile Strength Up to 30,000 psi (207 N/mm2) F
Working Temperature 600°C (1,100°F)
Elongation % 20
M Hardness HB 40 ~55 C
A Color Match Good (will darken if anodized) •
G Al Si Fe & Others I
Chemistry
(Core Wire) 95 4 Balance
Diameter (mm) 3.2
T N
Package Size (Lb) 1.0
S •
• For best results, use a slightly carburizing flame.
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
240
A T
L O
M B
Maintenance Alloys
Cross Reference Guide
C MG
C
B AFM ALL STATE CERTANIUM EUTECTIC
(MESSER)
INWELD UTP WELCO ROCKMONT
•
T PATRIARC 275 707 680 MG 600 955 62
Super
Missileweld
Brutus-A S
ALSTEEL-LH 616 747 66 MG 540 918 613 86 Polaris-A
AMSTEEL 1 Steel Arc Plus 700 Steeltectic MG 506 611 Steelweld Tartan B
B AMSTEEL 2 Steel Arc 701, 702 Beauty Weld MG 500 909 612 83-88 Tartan A L
R CHAMFER ARC
Chamfer Rod,
Cutting Elec- 100
CamferTrode, MG 560, 414, 82, Camferarc,
Electra
•
Cutrod 1 MG 570 450 82-AS Cutrod
Z trode A
4-60, 2-23, MG 210,
PREMIUM CAST-1 889/889SP 84, 85, 86 Jupiter A
4-60 Super 2-25 MG 289
CAST WELD-1 4 IMP 2-24 MG 200 713 8, 88, 888 94 Jupiter B
T CAST WELD-2 4-60 889 2250 MG 210 712 84, 85, 86 65 Jupiter A H
I CASTWELD-3 6 IMP 885 27 MG 220 717 81 28 Jupiter NM
•
NiMatrix, 282, 298, 4, MG 745, 501,
T IMPACT ARC
Super Join M 706/792 40 MG 750 503
63 / 630 240 Apollo A, B F
BUILD UP Roll Matrix 2-B MG 740 620 9B
ABRASARC 267 N6712 MG 760 6700 180 Olympia B000
M CHROMCARB HS-7 297 N6006 MG 770 711B/7100 Omega N

C
24 AC/DC, 421/423, MG 310, 32,
A BRONZE ARC
24 DC 429
2800
MG 320
626
320
23 Venus B •
G BRONZE G 11-13FC 70F / 87F 185XFC MG 130 285 2/6 14, 17, 17FC Olympia C I
ALUM ARC 34 608 2101, 2109 MG 400 606 48 26 Neptune A
ALUM COR SealCor 68C 21FC-E MG 420 230 ALFC Cor-Al Neptune GCF
T Steel: Bronze: N
S Patricarc - High strength for dissimilar steels Bronze Arc - Buildup and joining on copper, Brass and •
T AM Steel-LH - For low and medium carbon steels Bronze K
AM Steel-1 - Deep penetration on mild steels Bromze G - Oxy and Acet build up and joining
AM Steel-2 - Low heat input on mild steels
Chamfer Arc - Gouging, cutting and chamfering all steels
A
Cast Iron: Aluminum: S
E
Premium Cast-1 - Copper clad core for all cast iron Alum Arc - Electrode for weldable aluminum •
R Castweld-1 - Fully machinable all cast iron Alum Cor - Flux cored aluminum for torch E
O Castweld-2 - Cast to cast and cast to steel
Castweld-3 - Non-machinable for all cast iron
M Power: Hardfacing:
S
A AFM 1 - Bond Coat Impactarc - Severe impact on Manganese and steel
AFM 2 - Stainless type final coat Build Up - For buildup on steel •
I AFM 4 - Aluminum Bronze final cut Abrasarc - Impact and abrasion on steel W
N AFM 120SF - Spray and fuse Nickel Base 14RC Chromcarb - High abrasion and light impact on steel
AFM 140SF - Spray and fuse Nickel Base 38RC
AFM 160SF - Spray and fuse Nickel Base 60RC
I
F
N S
C
F M D
W
O S
241
A T
L O
M B
Reference & Useful Information
C C
B Contents Page •
T Inch & Millimeter Decimal Equivalents of Fractions of an Inch 243 S
Inch - millimeter Conversion Chart 244
Weights & Measures 244
B Feet Per Pound - Stainless Rounds 245 L
R General Conversion Formulas 246 •
Z A
Contents Page
T H
Recommended Gases for Welding
I •
GTAW Gases 247 ~ 248
T F
GMAW Gases 249 ~ 250
Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2] 251 ~ 259
M C
A •
G AWS Filler Metal Specifications by Material & Welding Process 260 I
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
242
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T Inch & Millimeter Decimal Equivalents of Fractions of an Inch S
Inch Inch
Millimeter Millimeter
Fraction Decimal Fraction Decimal
B 1/64 .015 625 0.396 875 33/64 .515 625 13.096 875 L
R 1/32 .031 250 0.793 750 17/32 .531 250 13.493 750 •
Z 3/64 .062 500 1.190 625 35/64 .546 250 13.890 625 A
1/16 .078 125 1.587 500 9/16 .562 500 14.287 500
5/64 .093 750 1.984 375 37/64 .578 125 14.684 375
3/32 .109 375 2.381 250 19/32 .593 750 15.081 250
T H
7/64 .125 000 2.778 125 39/64 .609 375 15.478 125
I 1/8 .140 625 3.175 000 5/8 .625 000 15.875 000
•
T 9/64 .156 250 3.571 875 41/64 .640 625 16.271 875 F
5/32 .171 875 3.968 750 21/32 .656 250 16.668 750
11/64 .187 500 4.365 625 43/64 .671 875 17.065 625
M 3/16 .203 125 4.762 500 11/16 .687 500 17.462 500 C
A 13/64 .203 125 5.159 375 45/64 .703 125 17.859 375 •
7/32 .218 750 5.556 250 23/32 .718 750 18.256 250
G I
15/64 .234 375 5.953 125 47/64 .734 375 18.653 125
1/4 .250 000 6.350 000 3/4 .750 000 19.050 000
17/64 .265 625 6.746 875 49/64 .765 625 19.446 875
T 9/32 .281 250 7.143 750 25/32 .781 250 19.843 750 N
S 19/64 .296 875 7.540 625 51/64 .796 875 20.240 625 •
T 5/16 .312 500 7.937 500 13/16 .812 500 20.637 500 K
21/64 .328 125 8.334 375 53/64 .828 125 21.034 375
11/32 .343 750 8.731 250 27/32 .843 750 21.431 250
A 23/64 .359 375 9.128 125 55/64 .859 375 21.828 125
S
E 3/8 .375 000 9.525 000 7/8 .875 000 22.225 000
•
R 25/64 .390 625 9.921 875 57/64 .890 625 22.621 875
13/32 .406 250 10.318 750 29/32 .906 250 23.018 750 E
O
27/64 .421 875 10.715 625 59/64 .921 875 23.415 625
7/16 .437 500 11.112 500 15/16 .937 500 23.812 500
M 29/64 .453 125 11.509 375 61/64 .953 125 24.209 375 S
A 15/32 .468 750 11.906 250 31/32 .968 750 24.606 250
•
I 31/64 .484 375 12.303 125 63/64 .984 375 25.003 125
W
N 1/2 .500 000 12.700 000 1 1.000 000 25.400 000
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
243
A T
L O
M B
C C
B Inch - Millimeter Conversion Chart (1 Inch = 25.4 Millimeters) •
T S
Gauge Inch Decimal Millimeters Gauge Inch Decimal Millimeters
30 .0120 .3048 16 .0598 1.5189
29 .0135 .3429 15 .0673 1.7094
B 28 .0149 .3785 14 .0747 1.8974 L
R 27 .0164 .4166 13 .0897 2.2784 •
Z 26 .0179 .4547 12 .1046 2.6568 A
25 .0209 .5309 11 .1196 3.0378
24 .0239 .6071 10 .1345 3.4163
23 .0269 .6833 9 .1495 3.7973
T H
22 .0299 .7595 8 .1644 4.1758
I 21 .0329 .8357 7 .1793 4.5542
•
T 20 .0359 .9119 6 .1943 4.9352 F
19 .0418 1.0617 5 .2092 5.3137
18 .0478 1.2141 4 .2242 5.6947
M 17 .0538 1.3665 3 .2391 6.0731 C
A •
G Weights & Measures I
1 pound (lb) = 453.6 grams 1 kilometer = 0.62137 mile
100 lb = 45.36 kilograms = 3,280 feet
T N
112 lb = 50.80 kilograms 1 square inch = 6.4516 square centimeters
S 1 short ton (2,000 lb) = 907.2 kilograms = 645.16 millimeters
•
T 1 long ton (2,240 lb) =1,016 kilograms 1 square foot = 0.0929 square meter K
1 kilo grams = 2,2046 lbs 1 square yard = 0.8361 square meter
100 kilograms = 220.46 lbs 1 square millimeter = 0.00155 square inch
A 1 metric ton (1,000 kilograms) = 2,204.6 lbs 1 square centimeter = 0.155 square inch S
E = 0.9842 gross ton 1 square meter = 10.7639 square feet
•
R = 1.1023 net tons = 1.196 square yards
E
O 1 inch = 25.40 millimeters 1 pound per foot = 1.4882 kilograms per meter
1 foot (12 inches) = 30.48 centimeters 1 pound per yard = 0.4961 kilograms per meter
M 1 yard (3 feet) = 91.44 centimeters 1 pound per square inch = 0.0703 kilograms per
1 mile (1,760 yard) = 1,609.35 meters square centimeter S
A
1 millimeter = 0.03937 inches 1 pound per square foot = 4.8825 kilograms per •
I 1 centimeter = 0.3937 inches square meter W
N 1 meter = 39.37 inches 1 kilogram per meter = 0.6720 pounds per feet
= 3.2808 feet 1 kilogram per square millimeter = 1,422.32 pounds per square inch
I 1 kilogram per square centimeter = 14.2232 pounds per square inch
F
N 1 kilogram per square meter = 0.2048 pounds per square foot
C
F = 1.8433 pounds per square yard
W
O
244
A T
L O
M B
C Feet Per Pound - Stainless Rounds C
B Diameter Inches Feet Per Pound Diameter Inches Feet Per Pound Diameter Inches Feet Per Pound •
T .016 1,445 .057 114 .098 38.4 S
.017 1,280 .058 110 .099 37.7
.018 1,141 .059 106 .100 36.9
.019 1,024 .060 103 .105 33.7
B .020 925 .061 99 .109 31.3
L
R .021 839 .062 96 .114 28.5 •
Z .022 764 .063 93 .120 25.8 A
.023 699 .064 90 .125 23.6
.024 642 .065 88 .135 20.6
T .025 592 .066 85 .140 18.8

H
.026 547 .067 82 .148 17.1
I •
.027 507 .068 80 .156 15.1
T .028 472 .069 78 .162 14.3
F
.029 440 .070 75 .171 12.64
.030 411 .071 73 .177 11.97
M .031 385 .072 71 .178 10.57 C
A .032 361 .073 69 .192 10.17 •
G .033 340 .074 68 .203 8.97
I
.034 320 .075 65.7 .207 8.75
.035 302 .076 64 .218 7.78
.036 285 .077 62.3 .225 7.39
T .037 270 .078 60.7 .234 6.75 N
S .038 256 .079 59.2 .243 6.31 •
T .039 243 .080 57.7 .250 5.92 K
.040 231 .081 56.3 .262 5.44
.041 220 .082 54.9 .283 4.68
A .042 210 .083 53.6 .306 3.99
S
E .043 200 .084 52.3 .3125 3.84
•
R .044 191 .085 51.1 .331 3.42
E
O .045 183 .086 49.9 .344 3.17
.046 175 .087 48.8 .3625 2.85
.047 167 .088 47.7 .375 2.67
M .048 160 .089 46.6 .394 2.42 S
A .049 154 .090 45.6 .406 2.27 •
I .050 148 .091 44.6 .430 2.02
W
N .051 142 .092 43.6 .4375 1.96
.052 137 .093 42.7 .462 1.76
I .053 132 .094 41.8 .469 1.71
.054 127 .095 40.9 .490 1.56 F
N
.055 122 .096 40.1 .500 1.50 C
F .056 118 .097 39.2 W
O
245
A T
L O
M B
C C
B •
T General Conversion Formulas S
Covert To Formula Example
ksi (1,000 lb/in )- MPa (N/mm )
2 2
ksi X 6.8948 50.77 ksi =350 MPa
B L
MPa (N/mm ) - ksi (1,000 lb/in )
2 2
MPa X 0.14503774 350 MPa = 50.77 ksi
R •
psi (1 lb/in2)- MPa (N/mm2) psi X 0.0068948 39,160 psi = 270 MPa
Z A
MPa (N/mm ) - psi (1 lb/in )
2 2
MPa X 145.03774 270 MPa = 39,160 psi
T H
I Covert To Formula Example •
T ft/lb - J ft/lb X 1.35582 50 ft/lb = 67.79 J F
J - ft/lb J X 0.737562 67.79 J = 50 ft/lb
ft/lb - kg/m ft/lb X 0.138255 50 ft/lb = 6.91275 kg/m
M kg/m - ft/lb kg/m X 7.23301 6.913 kg/m = 49.999899 ft/lb C
A lb/ft - kg/m lb/ft X 1.48817 5 lb/ft = 7.44085 kg/m •
G kg/m - lb/ft kg/m X 0.67196624 7.44085 kg/m = 5 lb/ft I
T Covert To Formula Example N

S mm - in mm X 0.03937008 10 mm = 0.394 in •
T in - mm in X 25.4 2 in = 50.80 mm K
mm - ft mm X 0.00328084 304.8 mm = 1.00 ft
ft - mm ft X 304.8 3 ft = 914.4 mm
A
S
E
•
R
Covert To Formula Example E
O
kg - lb kilograms X 2.2046 10 kg = 22.046 lb
lb - kg pounds X 0.453597024 10 lb = 4.536 kg
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
246
A T
L O
M B
C GTAW Gases: C
B •
T Shielding Gases (see Table 1) S
Argon (SG-A)
Argon, an inert gas, is the most commonly used shielding gas for the GTAW process.
B It has low thermal conductivity and provides a narrow arc column. L
R Argon affords welders considerable manipulative flexibility. •
Z Its low arc voltage characteristic permits arc length variations with minimal influence on arc energy & weld bead shape. A
Argon provides relatively easy arc initiation due to its low ionization potential.
Argon is preferred over helium for alternating current (AC) welding applications because of enhanced cleaning action,
arc stability, and weld appearance.
T Argon is denser than air, providing adequate shielding at lower flow rates than helium. H
I •
Helium (SG-He)
T F
Helium is a chemically inert shielding gas that has high thermal conductivity and high ionization potential.
Arc voltages are higher with helium than argon for a given current setting and arc length.
These attributes increase the heat input which affects bead width and depth of arc penetration.
M For this reason, helium is often mixed with argon for welding base metals with high melting temperatures or high ther- C
mal conductivity.
A •
When using direct current electrode negative (DCEN) for mechanized GTAW of aluminum, helium shielding provides
G greater depth of fusion and higher travel speeds than argon. I
Mechanical removal of surface oxides is generally required when using GTAW with DCEN and helium shielding gas for
welding aluminum.
Although it offers definite advantages for some applications, helium produces a less stable arc and less desirable arc start-
T ing characteristics than argon.
N
S Helium usually requires higher shielding flow rates than argon. •
T K
Argon+Helium (SG-AHe)
Helium is added to argon to take advantage of the best operating characteristics of each gas.
A The superior arc starting and stable arc characteristics of argon with helium’s higher thermal conductivity produce high-
quality gas tungsten arc welds on aluminum using alternating current. S
E
Increased travel speeds and greater depth of fusion, for both manual and mechanized welding of nonferrous alloys can •
R be produced as helium content is increased. E
O Helium content usually ranges between 25% and 75%.
M Argon+Hydrogen (SG-AH)
Additions of hydrogen increase the heat input, permitting faster travel, increased depth of fusion, better wetting action, S
A and broader weld bead profile. •
I Argon-hydrogen mixtures provide a reducing atmosphere in the arc, removing oxygen from the weld area.
W
N A typical argon-hydrogen mixture is 95% argon and 5% hydrogen.
Mixtures of argon and hydrogen are frequently used to weld austenitic stainless steels. nickel, and nickel based alloys.
Argon-hydrogen mixtures should not be used to weld carbon or low alloy steels because of the potential of hydrogen-
I induced cracking,. F
N
C
F
W
O
247
A T
L O
M B
C Special safety precautions are required when mixing argon and hydrogen. C
B Users should NOT mix argon and hydrogen from separate cylinders without the use of approved •
T mixing equipment. S
Shielding Gas Flow Rates.

Shielding gas flow rates are influenced by the factors listed below.
B For example, the type of gas affects flow rates that may be required to produce a satisfactory weld. L
R Argon can be used for GTAW on all base metals. •
Z Typical flow rates are from 10 scfh to 35 scfh [5 L/min to 16 L/min]. A
Helium is less dense than argon and therefore may require higher flow rates.
(1) Type of base metal

T (2) Type and position of joint H
I (3) Torch position •
(4) Amperage
T F
(5) Type of gas
(6) Gas nozzle type and size
(7) Manual or automatic welding mode
M (8) Outdoor conditions such as wind C
A •
G Recommended Types of Current, Tungsten Electrodes, and Shielding Gases I
for GTAW of Different Metals and Alloys [Table 1]
Type of Tungsten
Metal Thickness Shielding Gases
Current (1), (2) Electrode Type (3)
T All AC Pure or Zirconiated Argon or Argon-Helium
N
S Aluminum Alloys >1/8 in. [3 mm] DCEN Thoriated Argon-Helium or Argon •
T <1/8 in. [3 mm] DCEP Thoriated or Zirconiated Argon K
Copper & All DCEN Thoriated Helium or Argon-Helium
Copper Alloys <1/8 in. [3 mm] AC Pure or Zirconiated Argon
A Nickel &
Nickel Alloys
All DCEN Thoriated Argon S
E
All AC Pure or Zirconiated Argon •
R Magnesium Alloys
<1/8 in. [3 mm] DCEP Zirconiated or Thoriated Argon E
O Plain Carbon & All DCEN Thoriated or Zirconiated Argon or Argon-Helium
Low Alloy Steels <1/8 in. [3 mm] AC Thoriated Argon
M DCEN Thoriated or Zirconiated Argon, Argon-Helium,
Hydrogen (5% Max.) (4) S
A Stainless Steel All
•
I AC Thoriated Argon
W
N Titanium Alloys All DCEN Thoriated Argon, Argon-Helium
Notes;
I (1) Where AC is listed, variable polarity or pulse current could be used.
(2) AC = Alternating current: DCEP = Direct current electrode positive; DCEN = Direct current electrode negative. F
N (3) Where thoriated tungsten electrodes are recommended, ceriated or lanthanated electrodes may also be used.
(4) Austenitic stainless steels only. C
F
W
O
248
A T
L O
M B
C GMAW Gases: C
B •
T Process Description S
Gas metal arc welding (GMAW) is a welding process that uses an arc between a continuous filler metal electrode
(which can be solid or metal cored) and the weld pool.
The arc continuously melts the wire as it is fed to the weld pool, and both are protected from the atmosphere by the flow
B of shielding gas. L
R •
Process Variations and Metal Transfer Modes.
Z A
The GMAW process includes distinctive metal transfer modes: short-circuiting transfer, globular transfer (in argon
and in carbon dioxide), spray transfer, pulsed spray transfer, and high-current-density rotational or non-rotational spray
(high deposition) transfer.
T Factors that determine metal transfer mode are current, electrode alloy type, electrode diameter, arc length, power sup- H
ply characteristics, and shielding gas.
I •
T Short-Circuiting Transfer Mode. F
The short-circuiting transfer mode occurs at low welding current and arc voltage.
The arc characteristics of this transfer mode produces a small fast-solidifying weld pool that is generally suited for
the joining of thin base metals in all positions, and for the filling of wide root openings.
M C
With material that is thicker than 1/8 in. 13 [mm], extreme care must be taken to prevent incomplete fusion.
A Since heat input is usually low, distortion of the work piece is minimized. •
G The electrode feeds at a constant speed and contacts the work piece or molten pool, at which time a short circuit occurs. I
The current from the power supply increases and heats the wire to a point where the end of the wire melts off, creating
an arc between the wire end and the work piece. At that point in the sequence, there is no metal transfer across the arc.
The welding wire short-circuiting sequence repeats itself from 50 to 250 times per second.
T N
S Globular Transfer Mode. •
T Globular transfer takes place when the current and arc voltage are between the short-circuiting and spray transfer K
range.
Regardless of the type of shielding gas, carbon dioxide yields this type of transfer at all usable welding currents above
A the short-circuiting range.
Globular transfer is characterized by an irregular drop size approximately 2 to 4 times the diameter of the electrode. S
E The mechanism producing globular transfer is generated in a specific current and voltage range. •
R With carbon dioxide, the droplet is not propelled across the arc.
E
O The droplet surface tension and the repelling force of the arc acting toward the wire end tends to hold the droplet on
the end of the wire until it transfers by gravity.
M Spray Transfer Mode. S

A In an argon-rich shielding gas, the transfer mode changes from globular to spray as welding current increases for any
•
I given electrode diameter.
The change takes place at a value called the “globular to spray transition current.” W
N Spray transfer in argon has a constricted arc column and pointed electrode tip.
I Molten metal transfers across the arc as small droplets.

The metal transfer is axially directed to the work piece. F
N
Since the metal droplets are small, the transfer rate can be as high as several C
F hundred droplets per second. W
O
249
A T
L O
M B
C Pulsed Spray Transfer Mode. C
B In the pulsed spray transfer mode, the current is cycled between a high and low value at a rate of up to several hundred •
T cycles per second. The low level current is below the spray transition current, while the high current pulse is above the S
spray transition current.
Metal is transferred to the work piece only during the high current pulse.
Ideally, one small droplet is transferred during each pulse. The rate of pulsing can vary depending on the power supply
B design and control circuitry. The background current maintains the arc. L
R The resulting lower average current levels and heat input allow for all-position welding of base metals less than 1/8 in. •
[3 mm] thick with a spray-type metal transfer mode.
Z A
High-Current-Density Spray Transfer Mode.
High-current-density spray transfer is a name given to a GMAW mode having specific arc characteristics created by
T a combination of wire feed speed, electrode extension, and shielding gas. H
Mixtures of argon with oxygen and/or carbon dioxide are most popular for carbon steel and low alloy steel electrodes.
I Filler metal deposition rates range between 18 lb/hr and 30 lb/hr [8 and 14 kg/hr] with an upper limit of 40 lb/hr •
T [18 kg/hr]. F
The arc characteristics of highcurrent-density transfer are further divided into rotational spray transfer and non-rota-
tional spray transfer modes.
M (1) High-Current-Density Rotational Spray Transfer Mode. C
A When using a solid carbon steel wire, a high wire feed speed is combined with a long electrode extension to create •
G an arc known as rotational spray arc transfer. The long contact tube to work piece distance produces resistance heating of I
the wire electrode and causes the electrode end to become molten.
The electro-magnetic forces generated by the current flow in the wire cause the molten wire end to rotate in a helical
path.
T The shielding gas affects the rotational transition current by changing the surface tension at the molten electrode end. N
S Gas mixtures of argon, carbon dioxide, oxygen can produce rotational spray transfer deposition rates of •
181b/hr to 30 lb/hr [8 kg/hr to 14 kg/hr] using contact tip to work piece distance of 7/8 in. to 1-1/2 in.
T K
[22 mm to 38 mm].
(2) High-Current-Density Non-Rotational Spray Transfer Mode.

A Non-rotational highcurrent-density spray transfer is produced when the molten wire end does not rotate. S
E Rotation is suppressed when the thermal conductivity of the shielding gas increases and the surface tension of the mol-
•
R ten electrode end increases. The droplet rate will decrease, and larger droplets will transfer across the arc.
Shielding gases with higher carbon dioxide or helium additions will raise the rotational spray transition current, thereby E
O
suppressing the tendency to rotate.
The arc is elongated and diffused but looks similar to conventional spray transfer.
M The plasma stream is axial and narrower than that produced by rotational spray transfer.
S
A This more concentrated heat source can produce an increased depth of fusion compared with rotational spray transfer at
the same welding current. •
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
250
A T
L O
M B
C Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2] C
AWS
B Metal Type Thickness Transfer Mode
Recommended
Designation per Advantages / Description
•
Shielding Gas
T A5.32 S
Up to 14 gauge Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8 Good depth of fusion and distortion
Or 0.064 in. Short Circuit Argon + 25% CO2 SG-AC-25 control to reduce potential burn-
[1.6 mm] Aegon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2 through.
B 14 gauge or
Higher deposition rates without burn- L
Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8 through. Minimum distortion and
R 0.064 in. to
Short Circuit Argon + 25% CO2 SG-AC-25 spatter.
•
1/8 in. [1.6 mm
Z to 3 mm]
Argon + He + CO2 SG-AHeC-G Good weld pool control for out of posi- A
tion welding.
100% CO2 SG-C High welding speed.
Argon + 15% CO2 SG-AC-15 Good depth of fusion and puddle
Short Circuit
T Argon + 18% CO2 SG-AC-18 control. H
Argon + 25% CO2 SG-AC-25 Applicable for out-of position welding.
I Short Circuit Suitable for high current & high speed
•
Argon + 25% CO2 SC-AC-25
T or Globular welding. F
Deep depth of fusion; low spatter: high
Short Circuit Argon + 50% CO2 SC-AC-50 travel speeds. Good out-of position
welding.
M Short Circuit
Deep depth of fusion and fastest travel C
A or Globular 100% CO2 SG-C
speeds but with higher melt-through
potential. High current mechanized
•
(buried arc)
G welding. I
Argon + 1% O2 SG-AO-1 Good arc stability; produces a more
Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2 fluid puddle as O, increases: good co-
Spray Transfer
Carbon Steel Argon + 5% O2 SG-AO-5 alescence & bead contour. Good weld
T Over 1/8 in.
Argon + 8% O2 SG-AO-8 appearance & weld pool control. N
S [3 mm] Argon + 5% CO2 SG-AC-5
Fluid weld pool and oxidizing to weld
metal causing higher amounts of slag
•
Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8
T Spray Transfer
and scale, as CO, increases. K
Good arc stability, weld soundness, and
increasing width of fusion.
A Short Circuit Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2

Applicable to both short-circuiting and
spray transfer modes. S
E Argon + 35% Helium SG-AHeC-35/ 1
Has a wide welding current range and •
R + 1% CO2
good arc performance.
Spray Transfer E
O Helium + 43% Argon SG-HeAC-43/2
Weld pool has good control which
results in improved weld contour.
+ 2% CO2
M Used for high deposition rate weld-

ing where 15 lb/hr to 30 lb/hr [7 kg/ S
A High-Current-
Argon + Helium + CO2 + O SG-AHeCO-G
hr to 14 kg/hr] is typical. Special
Density welding equipment and techniques are •
I Argon + CO2 + O2 SG-ACO-G
sometimes required to achieve these W
N deposition levels.
Used for both light-gauge and heavy
Argon + 2% to 8% O2 SG-AO-2 to 8
Over 14 gauge out-of-position weldments. Achieves
I or 0.064 in. Pulsed Spray
Argon + 5% to 20% CO2 SG-AC-5 to 20
good pulse spray stability over a wide
Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2 F
N [ 1.6 mm]
Argon +Helium + CO2 ST-AHeC-G
range of arc characteristics and deposi-
tion ranges. C
F (Continued On Next Page)
W
O
251
A T
L O
M B
C Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2] C
AWS
B Metal Type Thickness Transfer Mode
Recommended
Designation per Advantages / Description
•
Shielding Gas
T A5.32 S
Argon + 8% to 20% O2 SG-AC-8 to 20
Good coalescence and bead contour.
Short Circuit Helium + Argon + CO2 SG-HeAC-G
Good mechanical properties.
Argon + 8% CO2 +2% O2 SG-ACO-8/2
B Up to 3/32 in. L
High welding speeds. Good depth of
R [2 mm]
fusion and weld pool control.
•
Z Short Circuit Argon + 20% to 50% CO2 SG-AC-20 to 50 Applicable for out-of position welds. A
Suitable for high current and high-
speed welding.
Low &
High-Alloy Spray Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2
Reduces undercutting.
T Steel (Including Argon + 5% CO2 SG-AC-5
Higher deposition rates and improved H
High-Current- Argon + 8% CO2 SG-AC-8
I Density Rota- Argon + 10% CO2 SG-AC-10
head wetting. •
Deep depth of fusion and good me-
T Over 3/32 in.
tional and Non-
Rotational)
Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2
Argon + Helium + CO2 + O2
SG-ACO-B/2
SG-AHeCO-G
chanical properties. F
[2 mm]
Argon + 2% O2 Used for both light-gauge and heavy
SG-AO-2
Argon + 5% CO2 out-of-position weldments.
SG-AC-5
Pulsed Spray Argon + 8% CO2 + 2% O2 Achieves good pulse spray stability
M Helium + 43%
SG-ACO-B/2
over a wide range of arc characteristics C
SG-HeAC-43/2
A Argon + 2% CO2 and deposition ranges. •
G Up to 14 gauge Argon + 2% CO2 SG-AC-2
Good control of burn-through and dis-
tortion. Used also for the spray transfer
I
or 0.064 in. Short Circuit
mode. Weld pool fluidity is sometimes
[2 mm] Argon +5% CO2 SG-AC-5
sluggish, depending on the base alloy.
Low CO2 percentages in helium mix
T minimizes carbon pickup, which can N
Helium + 7.5% SG-HcAC-7.5/2.5
S Argon + 2.5% CO2 SG-AC-2 to 5
cause inter-granular corrosion with •
some alloys.
T Short Circuit
Argon + 2% to 5% CO2 SG-AHeC-G
Helium improves bead wetting action K
Argon + Helium + CO2 SG-HeAC-43/2
Over 14 gauge and contour. CO2 percentages over 5%
Helium + 43%
or 0.064 in. should be used with caution on some
Stainless Steel Argon + 2% CO2
A [2 mm] alloys.
Applicable for all position welding. S
E Argon + 1% O2 SG-AO-1 Good arc stability. Produces a fluid but
•
R Spray
Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2 controllable weld pool; good coales-
Argon + Helium + CO2 SG-AHeC-G cence and head contour. Minimizes E
O Helium + Argon + CO2 SG-HeAC-G undercutting on heavier thicknesses.
Argon + 1% O2 SG-AO-1 Used for both light- and heavy-gauge
M Over 14 gauge Argon + 2% O2 SG-AO-2 out-of-position weldments.
or 0.064 in. Pulsed Spray Argon + Helium + CO2 SG-AHeC-G Achieves good pulse spray stability S
A [2 mm] Helium + Argon + CO2 SG-HcAC-G over a wide range of arc characteristics
Argon + CO2 + H2 SG-ACH-G and deposition ranges. •
I
(Continued On Next Page) W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
252
A T
L O
M B
C C
Gas Selection for Gas Metal Arc Welding [Table 2]
B AWS
•
T Metal Type Thickness Transfer Mode
Recommended
Shielding Gas
Designation per Advantages / Description S
A5.32
Helium + 10% Argon SG-HeA-10

Up to 1/8 in. Good arc stability, weld pool control
Short Circuit Helium + 25% Argon SG-HeA-25
B [3 mm]
Argon + Helium SG-AHe-G
and wetting. L
R Higher heat input of helium mixtures
•
Z Nickel,
Nickel Alloys, Argon + Helium SG-AHe-G
offset high heat conductivity of heavier A
gauges. Good wetting and bead con-
Copper &
tour. Can be used for out-of-position
Copper Alloys Over 1/8 in. Spray Argon + 50% Helium SG-AHe-50
welding.
[3 mm] Using 100% helium on heavier material
T Argon or Helium SG-A or SG-He
thickness improves bead wetting and
H
I depth of fusion. •
T Pulsed Spray Helium + Argon SG-HeA-G Good out-of-position control. F
Best metal transfer, arc stability and
Up to 1/2 in. Spray or plate cleaning. Little or no spatter.
Argon SG-A
[13 mm] Pulsed Spray Removes oxides when used with DCEP
M Aluminum
(Reverse Polarity).
C
Helium + 25% Argon SG-HeA-25 High-heat input.
A Over 1/2 in. Spray or Argon + 50% Helium SG-AHe-50 Produces fluid puddle, flat bead con- •
G [13 mm] Pulsed Spray Argon 100% SG-A tour and deep depth of fusion. I
Helium 100% SG-He Minimizes porosity.
Excellent cleaning action.
Magnesium, Spray Argon SG-A Provides more stable arc than helium-
T Titanium rich mixtures.
N
& other All Thicknesses Higher heat input and less chance of
S Reactive Argon + 30% Helium SG-AHe-30
porosity. •
Spray Argon + 50% Helium AG-AHe-50
T Metals
Helium + 25% Argon SG-HeA-25
More fluid weld pool and improved K
wetting.
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
253
A T
L O
M B
C Argon (SG-A). C
B Argon is a chemically inert gas that is used alone and in combination with other gases for welding both ferrous and •
T nonferrous metals. S
All GMAW modes can use argon or argon mixes to achieve good weldability, required mechanical properties, stable arc
characteristics, and improved productivity.
The low ionization potential of argon helps create an excellent current path and superior arc stability.
B Argon produces a constricted arc column with high current density, which causes the arc energy to be concentrated over L
R a small surface area. •
The result is a depth of fusion profile with a distinct finger like shape as shown in diagram.
Z Argon is used for nonferrous base metals such as aluminum, nickel, copper, and magnesium alloys, as well as for reactive A
metals such as zirconium and titanium.
Argon and argon mixes provide spray transfer with excellent arc welding stability, penetration and bead profile.
T When welding ferrous base metals, argon is usually mixed with other gases such as oxygen, helium, and carbon dioxide. H
I Carbon Dioxide (SG-C). •
T Carbon dioxide is a chemically active gas. F
In the presence of an intense heat source such as a welding arc, it associates into carbon monoxide and free oxygen and
becomes active.
This is shown by the following equation: CO2→ CO2 +O
M The free oxygen, which is available in considerable amounts, reacts with other elements in the weld pool. C
A Although carbon dioxide is an active gas and produces an oxidizing effect, sound welds can be consistently achieved. •
G Carbon dioxide is often used for welding carbon steel. I
Its popularity is due to common availability, low cost, and weld performance.
The low cost per unit of gas does not automatically translate to lowest cost per foot of deposited weld.
Total weld cost with carbon dioxide shielding gas is influenced by bead contour, electrode spatter, and spatter removal.
T Carbon dioxide, by itself, will not support spray transfer. N
S Metal transfer is restricted to short-circuiting and globular transfer. •
The advantage of carbon dioxide is its increased depth of fusion compared to argon.
T K
The major disadvantage of carbon dioxide is harsh globular transfer with its characteristic spatter at elevated weld cur-
rents.
The weld surface resulting from using a 100% carbon dioxide shielding gas is usually heavily oxidized.
A A welding wire having higher amounts of deoxidizing elements may be needed to compensate for the reactive nature of S
E the gas.
•
R Overall, good mechanical properties can be achieved with carbon dioxide.
E
O
Argon Helium Helium/Argon
M
S
A
•
I
W
N Ar + CO2 CO2 Ar + O2
I
F
N
C
F Figure 1. Typical GMAW Bead & Penetration Profiles with Several Shielding Gases W
O
254
A T
L O
M B
C Helium (SG-He). C
B Helium is a chemically inert gas used for welding applications requiring higher heat inputs. •
T Helium may improve wetting action, width of fusion and travel speeds. S
It does not produce the stable arc provided by argon.
Helium has higher thermal conductivity than argon and a wider arc column.
The higher voltage gradient increases heat input compared with argon, promoting increased weld pool fluidity and better
B wetting action. L
R This is an advantage when welding aluminum, magnesium, and copper alloys. •
Helium is often mixed with argon to obtain the advantages of both gases.
Z Argon provides good arc stability and cleaning action, while helium promotes wetting with a broad width of fusion. A
Two-Component Shielding Gas Mixtures (see previous Table)

T H
Argon + Oxygen (SG-AO).
I The addition of small amounts of oxygen to argon greatly stabilizes the welding arc, increases the filler metal droplet
•
T transfer rate, lowers the spray transition current and influences bead shape when welding steels. F
The weld pool is more fluid and stays molten longer, allowing the metal to flow out toward the toe of the weld.
Argon oxygen mixtures produce a narrow deep penetration pattern that could be susceptible to porosity entrapment
during rapid weld pool cooling.
M Slower travel speeds reduce weld pool cooling rates and minimize porosity entrapment.
C
A Argon-oxygen shielding gas mixtures are available pre-blended in liquid form. •
G I
(1) Argon + 1% Oxygen (SG-AO-1).
This mixture is primarily used for spray transfer on stainless steels.
One percent oxygen is usually sufficient to stabilize the arc, increase the droplet rate and improve bead appearance.
T N
S (2) Argon + 2% Oxygen (SG-AO-2). •
T This mixture is used for spray arc welding on carbon steels, low alloy steels, and stainless steels. K
It provides additional wetting action over the 1% oxygen mixture.
Mechanical properties and corrosion resistance of welds made with 1% and 2% oxygen additions are equivalent.
A
(3) Argon + 5% Oxygen (SG-AO-5). S
E This mixture provides a more fluid, but still controllable, weld pool and permits higher travel speeds. •
R It is the most commonly used argon and oxygen mixture for carbon steel welding.
E
O
M Argon S
A Figure 2.
The Effect of Argon & Helium Shielding Gases •
I on Bead Profile & Penetration when W
N Welding Aluminum with GMAW
I Helium F
N
C
F
W
O
255
A T
L O
M B
C Argon + Carbon Dioxide Mixtures (SGAC). C
B •
T The argon + carbon dioxide mixtures are used mainly on carbon and low alloy steels and have limited application on S
stainless steels.
Carbon dioxide additions to argon allow increased travel speeds with greater depth and width of fusion.
With these mixtures, increasing the amount of carbon dioxide will result in an increase in the level of spatter and a de-
B crease in deposition efficiency. L
R In GMAW with carbon dioxide additions, a slightly higher current level must be provided in order to establish and •
maintain stable spray transfer.
Z Above approximately 20% carbon dioxide, spray transfer becomes unstable and periodic short-circuiting and globular
A
transfer occurs.
T (1) Argon + 2% to 10% Carbon Dioxide (SG-AC-2, SG-AC-5, SG-AC-8, SG-AC-10). H

These mixtures are used for spray, pulse spray and short-circuiting transfer on a variety of material and thickness.
I Argon with 2% carbon dioxide is a common mixture for pulse welding stainless steel.
•
T A 5% carbon dioxide mixture may be used for pulsed GMAW of low alloy steels being welded in other than the flat posi- F
tion.
With 5% to 10% carbon dioxide, the arc column is constricted.
The arc forces that develop give these mixtures more tolerance to mill scale with a controllable weld pool.
M C
A (2) Argon + 15% to 20% Carbon Dioxide (SG-AC-15, SG-AC-18, SG-AC-20). •
G This mixture range has been used for a variety of applications on carbon and low alloy steels. I
Maximum productivity on thin base metals can be achieved within this range.
This is done by minimizing excessive melt-through tendency by increasing deposition rates and travel speeds.
The lower carbon dioxide percentages also improve deposition efficiency by decreasing spatter loss.
T N
S (3) Argon + 21% to 49% Carbon Dioxide (SG-AC-21 to 49). •
T This range is commonly used for GMAW with the short circuit transfer mode on low-carbon steel. K
It was formulated to provide maximum short-circuiting frequency in the short circuit transfer mode with common
welding electrode sizes.
These mixtures operate well in high current applications on thick base metal.
A They promote good arc stability, weld pool control and weld bead appearance S
E
•
R (4) Argon + 50% Carbon Dioxide (SGAC-50).
This mixture is used where high heat inputs and increased fusion depth are needed. E
O
Recommended base metal thickness is above 1/8 in. [3 mm].
Fusion is increased in welding positions other than flat when utilizing the short-circuiting transfer mode.
M Good wetting and bead shape, without excessive fluidity, are the main advantages for pipe welding applications.
S
A Welding on thin-gauge materials with this mixture may produce excessive melt through.
When welding at high current levels, the metal transfer is similar to welding in 100% carbon dioxide. •
I
Some reduction in spatter is realized (in comparison to 100% CO2) due to the argon content. W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
256
A T
L O
M B
C Argon + Helium (SG-AHe). C
B Argon and helium mixtures are used primarily for welding nonferrous and reactive metals, such as aluminum, copper, •
T nickel, magnesium, and their alloys. S
They are also used for welding some carbon steels.
Helium is added to argon to take advantage of the best operating characteristics of each gas.
Generally, the thicker the base metal, the higher the percentage of helium.
B The addition of helium to an argon base gas will increase the heat input. L
R Small percentages of helium, as low as 10%, will affect the arc characteristics. •
As helium percentages increase, the arc voltage, spatter, and weld depth-to-width ratio will increase
Z (see figure 1 & 2), while porosity is minimized. A
The argon content must be at least 45% when mixed with helium to produce and maintain a stable spray transfer mode.
T (1) Argon + 25% to 50% Helium (SGAHe-25, SGAHe-50). H

These mixtures are used for welding nonferrous base metals when an increase in heat input is sought and weld bead ap-
I pearance is of primary importance. •
T F
(2) Helium + 25% to 50% Argon (SGHeA-25, SGHeA-50).
These mixtures further increase heat input in comparison to the mixtures having higher argon content.
They are used for welding of aluminum and magnesium greater than 1/2 in. [13 mm] thick in the flat position.
M They increase heat input and reduce porosity of welds in copper, aluminum, and magnesium C
A •
G (3) Helium + 10% to 25% Argon (SGHeA-10 to 25). I
These mixtures are used for welding copper over 1/2 in. [13 mm] thick and aluminum over 3 in. [75 mm] thick.
Their high-heat input improves weld fusion.
They may be used for short-circuiting transfer with nickel filler metals.
T N
S •
T K
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
257
A T
L O
M B
C Three-Component Shielding Gas Mixtures (see previous Table) C
B •
T Argon + Carbon Dioxide + Oxygen (SGACO). S
Mixtures containing these three components are versatile due to their ability to function with processes using short
circuit, globular, spray, pulsed, and high current-density spray transfer.
Several three component mixtures are available and their application will depend on the desired metal transfer modes.
B The advantage of these mixtures is their ability to shield carbon steel and low alloy steel of all thickness using any type of L
R metal transfer mode. •
These mixtures produce good welding characteristics and mechanical properties on carbon and low alloy steels.
Z On thin base metals, the oxygen constituent improves arc stability at low current levels (30 A to 60 A), permitting the arc
A
to be kept short and controllable.
This helps minimize excessive melt-through and distortion by lowering the total heat input in the weld zone.
T H
Argon + Helium + Carbon Dioxide (SGAHeC).
I Helium and carbon dioxide additions to argon increase the heat input to the weld, increasing bead wetting and fluidity.
•
T The weld bead profile becomes flatter and wider. F
(l) Argon + 10% to 40% Helium + 1% to 15% Carbon Dioxide.

Mixtures in this range have been developed for pulse spray arc welding of carbon. low alloy, and stainless steels.
M These mixtures are most often used on thick sections and in positions other than flat. C
A Good mechanical properties and weld pool control are characteristic of these mixtures. •
G I
(2) Helium + 25 % to 35 % Argon and 1% to 5% Carbon Dioxide.
These mixtures are used for the short-circuiting transfer mode in welding of high strength and stainless steels, espe-
cially for welding positions other than flat.
T The carbon dioxide content is kept low to insure good weld metal toughness. N
S The helium provides the heat necessary for good weld pool fluidity. •
T K
(3) Helium + 7.5% Argon + 2.5% Carbon Dioxide (SG-HeAC-7.5/2.5).
This mixture is widely used for the short circuit transfer mode in welding of stainless steel in all welding positions.
The carbon dioxide content is kept low to minimize carbon absorption and assure good corrosion resistance, especially
A in multipass welds. S
E The argon + carbon dioxide additions provide good arc stability and increased depth of fusion.
•
R The high helium content provides significant heat input to overcome the sluggish nature of the stainless steel weld pool.
E
O
Argon + Helium + Oxygen (SGAHeO).
Just as the addition of helium to argon increases the arc energy when welding nonferrous metals with the GMAW pro-
M cess, oxygen affects the arc characteristics when welding ferrous metals.
S
A Argon-helium-oxygen mixtures have been used occasionally with spray transfer to increase weld pool fluidity, control
bead shape and reduce porosity. •
I
W
N Argon + Nitrogen + Oxygen (SGANO).
Small amounts of nitrogen (1.0% to 3.0%) have been added to argon + 1% oxygen
I to achieve a completely austenitic microstructure in welds made with
Type 347 stainless steel filler metal. F
N
C
F
W
O
258
A T
L O
M B
C Four-Component Shielding Gas Mixtures (see previous Table) C
B •
T Argon + Helium + Carbon Dioxide + Oxygen (SG-AHeCO). S
Commonly known as a “quad mix;” this combination is most popular for high-deposition GMAW using the high-cur-
rent-density metal transfer mode.
This mixture will give good mechanical properties and operability throughout a wide range of deposition rates.
B Its major application is welding low-alloy, high-tensile-strength base materials, but it has also been used on mild steel for L
R high productivity welding. •
Weld economics are an important consideration in using this gas for welding mild steel.
Z A
Flux Cored Arc Welding
T Process Description. H
I Flux cored arc welding (FCAW) is an arc welding process that produces coalescence of metals by heating them with an •
are between a continuous flux-cored metal electrode and the weld pool.
T Shielding is provided by either the decomposition of the flux contained within the electrode or externally supplied gas or
F
both.
M Shielding Gases C
A Carbon Dioxide (SG-C). •
G Welding with carbon dioxide shielding gas is generally characterized by a globular metal transfer mode. I
The oxidizing characteristic of carbon dioxide is well known to the developers and manufacturers of flux cored elec-
trodes.
Deoxidizing materials are added to the core of the electrode to compensate for the oxidizing effect of the carbon dioxide.
T The deoxidizing elements have a great affinity for oxygen and readily combine with it. N
S •
T Gas Mixtures. K
The trend toward using smaller diameter welding electrodes to obtain greater versatility has resulted in the use of more
gas mixtures.
A The most common mixture for FCAW is argon + 25% carbon dioxide.
Because of the poor transfer of deoxidizing elements in FCAW when using carbon dioxide. S
E All electrodes designed for use with carbon dioxide are heavily deoxidized. •
R When these same electrodes are used with gas mixtures utilizing argon based gases, a buildup of manganese, silicon, and
E
O other deoxidizing elements may occur.
Welds produced using these mixtures generally have higher strengths but slightly lower ductility than welds made under
the same conditions with carbon dioxide.
M Many manufacturers provide different FCAW electrodes for use in either 100% carbon dioxide or argon based mixtures. S
A Three component mixtures such as argon + carbon dioxide + oxygen have been used with good results with certain
•
I HSLA materials.
W
N
(The following information was provided by AWS C5.10/C5.10M:2003
Recommended Practices for Shielding Gases for Welding and Cutting)
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
259
A T
L O
M B
AWS Filler Metal Specifications by Material & Welding Process
C C
GTAW
B OFW SMAW GMAW FCAW SAW ESW EGW Brazing
•
T PAW S
A5.8
Carbon Steel A5.2 A5.1 A5.18 A5.20 A5.17 A5.25 A5.26
A5.31
B Low-Alloy Steel A5.2 A5.5 A5.28 A5.29 A5.23 A5.25 A5.26
A5.8 L
R A5.31 •
Z A5.9 A5.8 A
Stainless Steel - A5.4 A5.22 A5.9 A5.9 A5.9
A5.22 A5.31
A5.8
Cast Iron A5.15 A5.15 A5.15 A5.15 - - -
A5.31
T A5.8 H
Nickel Alloys - A5.11 A5.14 - A5.14 - -
I A5.31 •
T Aluminum Alloys - A5.3 A5.10 - - - -
A5.8 F
A5.31
A5.8
Copper Alloys - A5.6 A5.7 - - - -
A5.31
M C
A5.8
A Titanium Alloys - - A5.16 - - - -
A5.31 •
G A5.8 I
Zirconium Alloys - - A5.24 - - - -
A5.31
A5.8
Magnesium Alloys - - A5.19 - - - -
T A5.31 N
S Tungsten Electrodes - - A5.12 - - - - - •
T K
A5.8
Brazing Alloys & Fluxes - - - - - - -
A5.31
A Surfacing Alloys
A5.13 A5.13 A5.13
- - - - -
A5.21 A5.21 A5.21 S
E
•
R Consumable Inserts - - A5.30 - - - - -
E
O
Shielding Gases - - A5.32 A5.32 - - A5.32 -
M
S
A • OFW - Oxyfuel Gas Welding • FCAW - Fluxed Core Arc Welding
•
I
• SMAW - Shielded Metal Arc Welding • SAW - Submerged Arc Welding W
N
• GTWA - Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (TIG) • ESW - Electro Slag Welding
I
F
N • GMAW - Gas Metal Arc Welding (MIG) • EGW - Electro Gas Welding
C
F
• PAW - Plasma Arc Welding W
O
260
A T
L O
M B
C Please Click Here to Clear Input Value C
B •
T Convert ksi to MPa Please type ksi value to convert below. Converted MPa value S
ksi X
B L
Convert MPa to ksi Please type MPa value to convert below. Converted ksi value
R •
MPa X
Z A
Convert psi to MPa Please type psi value to convert below. Converted MPa value
T psi X H
I •
T Convert MPa to psi Please type MPa value to convert below. Converted psi value F
MPa X
M C
A Please Click Here to Clear Input Value •
G I
Convert ft/lb to J Please type ft/lb value to convert below. Converted J value
ft/lb X
T N
S •
Convert J to ft/lb Please type J value to convert below. Converted ft/lb value
T K
JX
A Convert ft/lb to kg/m Converted kg/m value

Please type ft/lb value to convert below. S
E
ft/lb X •
R
E
O
Convert kg/m to ft/lb Please type kg/m value to convert below. Converted ft/lb value
M kg/m X
S
A
•
I Convert lb/ft to kg/m Please type lb/ft value to convert below. Converted kg/m value
W
N lb/ft X
I Convert kg/m to lb/ft Please type kg/m to convert value below. Converted lb/ft value F
N
kg/m X C
F
W
O
261
A T
L O
M B
C Please Click Here to Clear Input Value C
B •
T Convert mm to inch Please type mm value to convert below. Converted inch value S
mm X
B L
Convert inch to mm Please type inch value to convert below. Converted mm value
R •
Z inch X A
Convert mm to ft Please type mm value to convert below. Converted ft value

T mm X H
I •
T F
Convert ft to mm Please type ft value to convert below. Converted mm value
ft X
M C
A •
Please Click Here to Clear Input Value
G I
Convert kg to lb Please type kg value to convert below. Converted lb value

T kg X N
S •
T Convert lb to kg Please type lb value to convert below. Converted kg value
K
lb X
A
S
E
•
R
E
O
M
S
A
•
I
W
N
I
F
N
C
F
W
O
262

Soldadura General - Catalog-(S) PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Soldadura General - Catalog-(S) PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

http://www.amfiller.

Staineless Steel Wire

Carbon Steel Low Alloys - Electrodes Low Alloys - Wires Hardfacing

Cast Iron Nickel Alloys STS Electrodes STS Wires

Flux Cored Wires Aluminum Alloys Cobalt Alloys Bronze Alloys

Titanium Alloys Magnesium Alloys Tungsten Alloys Aerospace Alloys

A Important Notice for All Users of This Book

B AFM E6011 AWS/SFA A5.1 E6011 8 L

T AFM E7018-1 AWS/SFA A5.1 E7018-1 12 H

Designates the tensile strength (minimum), in ksi.

Recommended Current Ranges (DC+):

A Typical Mechanical Properties: S

A Typical Mechanical Properties:

Typical Mechanical Properties:

M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S

B AFM E8018-B2 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-B2 18 L

T AFM E8018-C3 AWS/SFA A5.5 E8018-C3 22 H

Preheat, Interpass & Postweld Heat Treatment Temperatures 31

Designates the tensile strength (minimum), in ksi.

C Order of Mandatory Classification Designators C

Indicates in 1000 psi increments, the minimum tensile strength

T Indicates the chemical composition of a solid electrode or H

M Optional supplemental diffusible hydrogen designator. C

Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+):

M Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): C

M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%):

Typical Mechanical Properties:

M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): S

Typical Mechanical Properties:

M Typical Weld Metal Chemistry (%): C

T Recommended Current Ranges (AC or DC+): H

M AFM ER70S-B2L AWS/SFA A5.28 ER70S-B2L 37 C

M [Table 1] Minimum Tension Test Requirements 48 S

B Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: L

A Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods:

Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods:

M Typical mechanical properties: C

All values are considered maximum, unless otherwise noted.

T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: H

Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: H

M Minimum Tension Test Requirements: C

M Minimum Tension Test Requirements: C

T Chemical Composition Requirements for Solid Electrodes and Rods: H

Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

I Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

Minimum Tension Test Requirements:

II. Spray Transfer

(continued on next page)

T V. Short Circuiting Transfer H

T AFM Sugar Rod - 58 H

Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+):

Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+):

T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): N

T Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+): N

Typical All Weld Metal Chemistry (%):

A Typical Chemical Composition (%):

C Order of Mandatory Classification Designators C

Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal

M Designates the chemical composition of the filler metal C

Recommended Amperage (AC or DC+):

Chemical Composition Requirements for Undiluted Weld Metal (%):

Designates the group of electrodes according to